MD380 Series Advanced Vector Vontrol Inverter User Manual

Preface
Thank you for purchasing the MD380 series advanced vector control inverters.
MD380 series inverter is an advanced product based on MD320. They have the same
applications. Compared with MD320, the MD380 series inverter improves the control of
motor, implementing control of both asynchronous motor and permanent magnet
synchronous motor, increases the user programmable function and background
monitoring software, and supports multi-kind PG cards.
This manual describes how to properly use the MD380 series inverter. Read and
understand the instructions and safety precautions in the manual before the installation,
operation, maintenance and inspection of the product.
Notes
 The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective
guards. Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first,
and then perform operations in accordance with the instructions.
 The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match
the product you purchased.
 The instructions are subject to change due to product upgrade, specification

modification as well as the efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of
the manual.
 Please feel free to contact our agents or customer service center if you have
some questions during the use.
 Service Hotline: 400-777-1260.
1

Introduction
Compared with MD320, the MD380 series inverter achieves the following improvements:
1. Multiple voltage classes
It provides coverage of single-phase 220V, three-phase 220V, three-phase 380V,

three-phase 480V, three-phase 690V and three-phase 1,140V.
2. Control of asynchronous motor and synchronous motor
It supports vector control of three-phase AC asynchronous motor and three-phase AC

permanent magnet synchronous motor.
3. Diversified control modes
It supports speed sensor vector control (FVC), speed sensor-less vector control
(SVC), V/F control and V/F separation control
4. Multiple communication protocols
It supports communication via Modbus-RTU, Profibus-DP, CANlink and CANopen.

5. Multiple encoder types
It supports various encoders such as differential encoder, open-collector encoder,

rotating transformer and UVW encoder.
6. All-new SVC algorithm
It introduces all-new SVC algorithm that brings better low-speed stability & bigger
low-frequency load capacity, and supports torque control.
7. User programmable function
The MD38PC1 programmable card enables the user to write programs in ladder
diagram. Its programming environment is compatible with that of the H1U series PLC.
8. Advanced background software
The background software helps to achieve functions of parameter upload & download
and real-time oscillograph.
9. Other new functions
The newly increased functions of the MD380 series are described as below:
Function Description
Virturl I/O It can implement various simple logic functions.
Motor overheated The optional MD38IO1 extension card enables AI3 to receive the motor
protectoon temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000) so as to realize motor
2

Function Description
overheated protection.
Rapid current limit It helps to avoid frequent over-current faults of the inverter.
Multi-motor switchover Four motors can be switched over via four groups of motor parameters.
Restore user
It supports users to save or restore the parameters set by themselves.
parameters
The AI/AO accuracy can reach almost 20mv via factory correction or
Higher-accuracy AI/AO
on-site correction.
Customized parameter
The user can customize the parameters that need to be displayed.
display
Modified parameter
The user can query the modified parameters.
display
At fault occurrence, the user can select the action mode of the inverter
based on actual needs. The action modes are as below:
 Coast to stop
Operation selection at
 Decelerate to stop
fault occurrence
 Continue to run
The user can also select the frequency at which the inverter continues to
run.
PID parameters Two groups of PID parameters can be switched over via terminals or can
switchover be automatically switched over according to deviation.
PID feedback loss

The PID feedback loss value can be set to realize PID protection.
detection
DI/DO positive or
The user can set the DI/DO positive or negative logic.
negative logic
DI/DO response delay The user can set DI/DO response delay time.
It ensures the inverter to continue to run in short time at instantaneous

Power dip ride through
power failure or sudden voltage step-down.
Timing operation The inverter supports timing operation for 6500 minutes at maximum.
Product Checking
Upon unpacking, please check:

3

 Whether the nameplate model and inverter rated values are consistent with your
order. The box contains the inverter, certificate of conformity, user manual and
warranty card.
 Whether the inverter is damaged during transportation. If you find any omission or
damage, please contact our company or the supplier immediately.
First-time Use
The users who use this product for the first time shall read the manual carefully. For any
doubt on some functions and performances, please feel free to contact the technical
support personnel of our company so as to ensure correct use.
CE
The MD380 series inverter complies with the following international standards:
 IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 2003 Safety Regulations on Commissionable Electric Drive

System
 IEC/EN 61800-3: 2004 Commissionable Electric Drive System
 IEC/EN 61800-3 standard in the condition of proper installation and use according to
sections 7.3.2 and 7.3.6 (EMC standard and specific test method).
Some products have passed the CE certification.
4

Connection to Peripheral Devices
 Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor at the output side of the inverter.
Otherwise, it may cause the inverter failure or capacitor and surge suppressor
damaged.
 Because the inverter input/output (main circuit) contains harmonic components,

which may interfere with the inverter’s accessories communications equipment,
install anti-interference filter so as to minimize the interference.
 For more details on peripheral devices and accessories, refer to related selection
manual.
5

Chapter 1 Safety and Precautions
In this manual, the safety precautions are graded based on the degree of danger:
 indicates that severe personal injury even death may result due to improper
operation.
 indicates that personal injury or property damage may result due to improper
operation.
Please read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding. Installation,
commissioning or maintenance of the control system may be performed in conjunction
with the documentation. Our company will assume no liability or responsibility for any
injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Precautions
Safety
Use Stage Precautions
Grade
 Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage, component

scarcity or damage upon unpacking.
 Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform to
the product you received.
Before  Handle it with care during transportation. Otherwise, the equipment

installation may be damaged.
 Do not use the inverter that is damaged or not intact. Otherwise, you
may get hurt.
 Do not touch the components of the control system with your hands.
Otherwise, static electricity damage may result.
 Please mount the inverter on incombustible surface like metal. Keep

it far away from combustible materials. Otherwise, a fire may result.
 Do not loosen the fixed bolts of the components, especially the bolts
with red marks.
During  Do not drop wire end or screw into the inverter. Otherwise, the
Installation inverter may be damaged.
 Install the inverter in the places where it is free of vibration and direct
sunlight.
 When installing two inverters in a cabinet, pay attention to the

installation position so as to ensure the heat elimination effect.
6

 Wiring may be performed only by authorized personnel under

instructions described in this manual. Otherwise, unexpected
accident may result.
 The mains and the inverter must be separated by a circuit breaker.

Otherwise, a fire may result.
 Make sure that the power input is cut off before wiring. Otherwise,
electric shock may result.
 Please tie the inverter to ground properly by standard. Otherwise,

Wiring electric shock may result.
 Do not connect power supply to the U, V and W output terminals of

the inverter. Wrong wiring will result in inverter damaged
 For wire size, refer to this manual. Otherwise, accidents may occur!
 Brake resistor cannot be connected between the DC bus terminals

(+) and (-). Otherwise, a fire may result.
 Use shielded wires for encoder lines and ensure that one end of the
shielding layer must be connected to ground securely.
 Please make the following confirmations:
− Whether the power supply’s voltage class is consistent with the

rated voltage class of the inverter.
− Whether input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W)

are properly connected.
− Whether there is any short circuit in peripheral circuit;
− Whether the wiring is secured.

Before
power-on Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
 Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the inverter
since such test was done in the factory. Otherwise, accidents may
result.
 Cover the inverter properly before power-on. Otherwise, electric

shock may result.
 All periphery devices must be wired properly under the instructions

described in this manual. Otherwise, accidents may result.
 Do not open the inverter’s cover plate after power-on. Otherwise,
After electric shock may result.
power-on  Do not touch any I/O terminal of the inverter. Otherwise, electric
shock may result.
7

 If parameter identification needs to be performed, note that personal

injury may result during motor rotation.
 Do not change the factory settings of the inverter. Otherwise, the

equipment may be damaged.
 Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the

temperature. Otherwise, you may get burnt.
 Signal detection may only be performed by qualified personnel

during operation. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage
During may result.
operation
 Avoid objects falling into the inverter when it runs. Otherwise, the
inverter may be damaged.
 Do not start/stop the inverter by turn the contactor ON/OFF.

Otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
 Repair or maintenance of the inverter may only be performed by

authorized personnel. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment
damage may result.
 Do not repair or maintain the inverter when it is powered on.

Otherwise, electric shock may result.
During
Maintenance  Repair or maintain the inverter only ten minutes after the power of
the inverter is turned off. Otherwise, residual voltage in the capacitor
may injure people.
 All the insets must be unplugged in the condition of power-off.
 Reset and check the parameters when the inverter is replaced.
1.2 General Precautions

 Motor Insulation Test
Perform insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused after
storing for a long time, or in a regular checkup, aiming to prevent the poor insulation of
motor windings from damaging the inverter. The motor must be disconnected from the
inverter during the insulation test. A 500V mega-Ohm meter is recommended so that the
insulation resistance shall not be less than 5MΩ.
 Thermal Protection of Motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected is not matching that of the inverter, especially
when the inverter’s rated power is greater than the motor’s, adjust the motor protection
parameters inside the inverter or install a thermal relay to the motor to protect the motor.
 Running at over 50Hz
8

The inverter can output frequency of 0Hz-150Hz. If the user needs to make it run at over
50Hz, please consider the capacity of the machine.
 Vibration of Mechanical Device
The inverter may encounter the mechanical resonance point at some output frequencies,
which can be avoided by setting the skip frequency parameters in the inverter.
 Motor Heat and Noise
Since the output of the inverter is PWM wave with certain harmonic wave, the motor
temperature, noise, and vibration will slightly rise compared with power frequency drive.
 Voltage-sensitive Device or Capacitor at Output Side of the Inverter
Because the inverter outputs PWM wave, the capacitor for improving power factor or
voltage-sensitive resistor for lightning protection shouldn’t be installed at the inverter’s
output side. Otherwise, the inverter may suffer transient over-current or even be
damaged.
 Contactor at the I/O terminal of the Inverter
When a contactor is installed between the inverter’s input terminal and the power supply,
you cannot start/stop the inverter by turning the contactor ON/OFF. If you have to control
the inverter via the contactor, ensure that the time interval is at least one hour since
frequent charge and discharge will shorten the service life of the capacitor inside the
inverter.
When a contactor is installed between the inverter’s output terminal and the motor, do not
turn off the contactor when the inverter has outputs. Otherwise, modules inside the
inverter may be damaged.
 When External Voltage is out of Rated Voltage Range
The inverter shall not be used out of the allowable voltage range specified in this manual.
Otherwise, the inverter’s components may be damaged. If needed, please use
corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device.
 Three-phase Input Changed into Two-phase Input Prohibited
Do not change three-phase input of the inverter into two-phase input. Otherwise, fault will
result or the inverter will be damaged.
 Lightning Strike Protection
A lightning strike protection device is installed inside the inverter. The user should add
lightning protection device to the front end of the inverter in the places subject to frequent
lightning strikes.
 Altitude and De-rating
In the places where the altitude is above 1000m and the cooling effect gets worse due to
rare air, it is necessary to de-rate the inverter. Please feel free to contact our company for
9

detailed technical support.
 Some Special Usages
If the user needs to adopt the wiring of the inverter that is not described in this manual
such as common DC bus, please contact our company.
 Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors in the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt.
Poisonous gas will be generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Please treat them as
ordinary industrial waste.
 About Applicable Motor
1. The inverter is applicable to four-pole squirrel-cage asynchronous motor. Please be

sure to select the proper inverter according to the motor nameplate.
2. The cooling fan and rotor shaft of non-variable-frequency motor are coaxial, which
results in falling cooling effect when the rotating speed declines. Thus, add more
powerful fan or replace it with variable-frequency motor in applications where the
motor are easily overheated.
3. The standard parameters of adaptable motor have been configured inside the inverter.
But it is necessary to perform parameter identification or modify the default value
based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running result and protection function
performance will be affected.
4. Short circuit of cable or inside motor will cause the inverter to alarm or even be
damaged. Therefore, perform insulation short-circuit test when elevator motor and
cables are newly installed or during routine maintenance. During the test, make sure
that the inverter is disconnected from the testing parts.
10

Chapter 2 Product Information
2.1 Designation Rules
Brake unit
Inverter series
Null None
Voltage class B With brake unit
S Single-phase 220V
Model
2T Three-phase 220V Adaptable motor
power G General type
T Three-phase 380V
P Fan pump type
5T Three-phase 480V Mark 0.4 0.75 … 11 …
7T Three-phase 690V
Adaptable 0.4 0.75 … …
11
CT Three-phase 1140V motor (kW)
2.2 Nameplate
2.3 MD380 Series Inverter Models and Technical Data

Power Input Output Adaptable
Model Capacity Current Current Motor
(kVA) (A) (A) (kW) (HP)
Single-phase 220V, 50/60Hz
MD380S0.4GB 1 5.4 2.3 0.4 0.5
MD380S0.7GB 1.5 8.2 4 0.75 1
MD380S1.5GB 3 14 7 1.5 2
MD380S2.2GB 4 23 9.6 2.2 3
Three-phase 220V, 50/60Hz
MD380-2T0.4GB 1.5 3.4 2.1 0.4 0.5
MD380-2T0.75GB 3 5 3.8 0.75 1
MD380-2T1.5GB 4 5.8 5.1 1.5 2
MD380-2T2.2GB 5.9 10.5 9 2.2 3
11


(kVA) (A) (A) (kW) (HP)
MD380-2T3.7GB 8.9 14.6 13 3.7 5
MD380-2T5.5GB 17 26 25 5.5 7.5
MD380-2T7.5GB 21 35 32 7.5 10
MD380-2T11G 30 46.5 45 11 15
MD380-2T15G 40 62 60 15 20
MD380-2T18.5G 57 76 75 18.5 25
MD380-2T22G 69 92 91 22 30
MD380-2T30G 85 113 112 30 40
MD380-2T37G 114 157 150 37 50
MD380-2T45G 134 180 176 45 60
MD380-2T55G 160 214 210 55 75
MD380-2T75G 231 307 304 75 100
MD380T0.7GB 1.5 3.4 2.1 0.75 1
MD380T1.5GB 3 5 3.8 1.5 2
MD380T2.2GB 4 5.8 5.1 2.2 3
MD380T3.7GB 5.9 10.5 9 3.7 5
MD380T5.5GB MD380T5.5PB 8.9 14.6 13 5.5 7.5
MD380T7.5GB MD380T7.5PB 11 20.5 17 7.5 10
MD380T11GB MD380T11PB 17 26 25 11 15
MD380T15GB MD380T15PB 21 35 32 15 20
MD380T18.5G MD380T18.5PB 24 38.5 37 18.5 25
MD380T22G MD380T22P 30 46.5 45 22 30
MD380T30G MD380T30P 40 62 60 30 40
MD380T37G MD380T37P 57 76 75 37 50
MD380T45G MD380T45P 69 92 91 45 60
MD380T55G MD380T55P 85 113 112 55 75
MD380T75G MD380T75P 114 157 150 75 100
MD380T90G MD380T90P 134 180 176 90 125
MD380T110G MD380T110P 160 214 210 110 150
MD380T132G MD380T132P 192 256 253 132 200
MD380T160G MD380T160P 231 307 304 160 250
MD380T200G MD380T200P 250 385 377 200 300
MD380T220G MD380T220P 280 430 426 220 300
MD380T250G MD380T250P 355 468 465 250 400
MD380T280G MD380T280P 396 525 520 280 370
MD380T315G MD380T315P 445 590 585 315 500
MD380T355G MD380T355P 500 665 650 355 420
MD380T400G MD380T400P 565 785 725 400 530
12


(kVA) (A) (A) (kW) (HP)
MD380T450P 630 883 820 450 600
MD380-5T0.7GB 1.5 3.4 2.1 0.75 1
MD380-5T1.5GB 3 5 3.8 1.5 2
MD380-5T2.2GB 4 5.8 5.1 2.2 3
MD380-5T3.7GB 5.9 10.5 9 3.7 5
MD380-5T5.5GB MD380-5T5.5PB 8.9 14.6 13 5.5 7.5
MD380-5T7.5GB MD380-5T7.5PB 11 20.5 17 7.5 10
MD380-5T11GB MD380-5T11PB 17 26 25 11 15
MD380-5T15GB MD380-5T15PB 21 35 32 15 20
MD380-5T18.5G MD380-5T18.5PB 24 38.5 37 18.5 25
MD380-5T22G MD380-5T22P 30 46.5 45 22 30
MD380-5T30G MD380-5T30P 40 62 60 30 40
MD380-5T37G MD380-5T37P 57 76 75 37 50
MD380-5T45G MD380-5T45P 69 92 91 45 60
MD380-5T55G MD380-5T55P 85 113 112 55 70
MD380-5T75G MD380-5T75P 114 157 150 75 100
MD380-5T90G MD380-5T90P 134 180 176 90 125
MD380-5T110G MD380-5T110P 160 214 210 110 150
MD380-5T132G MD380-5T132P 192 256 253 132 175
MD380-5T160G MD380-5T160P 231 307 304 160 210
MD380-5T200G MD380-5T200P 250 385 377 200 260
MD380-5T220G MD380-5T220P 280 430 426 220 300
MD380-5T250G MD380-5T250P 355 468 465 250 350
MD380-5T280G MD380-5T280P 396 525 520 280 370
MD380-5T315G MD380-5T315P 445 590 585 315 420
MD380-5T355G MD380-5T355P 500 665 650 355 470
MD380-5T400G MD380-5T400P 565 785 725 400 530
MD380-5T450P 630 883 820 450 600
MD380-7T55G 84 70 65 55 70
MD380-7T75G MD380-7T75P 107 90 86 75 100
MD380-7T90G MD380-7T90P 125 105 100 90 125
MD380-7T110G MD380-7T110P 155 130 120 110 150
MD380-7T132G MD380-7T132P 192 170 150 132 175
MD380-7T160G MD380-7T160P 231 200 175 160 210
MD380-7T200G MD380-7T200P 250 235 215 200 260
MD380-7T220G MD380-7T220P 280 247 245 220 300
MD380-7T250G MD380-7T250P 355 265 260 250 350
13


(kVA) (A) (A) (kW) (HP)
MD380-7T280G MD380-7T280P 396 305 299 280 370
MD380-7T315G MD380-7T315P 445 350 330 315 420
MD380-7T355G MD380-7T355P 500 382 374 355 470
MD380-7T400G MD380-7T400P 565 435 410 400 530
MD380-7T450G MD380-7T450P 630 490 465 450 600
MD380-7T500G MD380-7T500P 700 595 550 500 660
MD380-7T560P 784 605 575 560 750
MD380-CT37G 57 25.7 25 37 50
MD380-CT45G 69 30.9 30 45 60
MD380-CT55G 85 38.2 37 55 70
MD380-CT75G 114 51.5 50 75 100
MD380-CT90G 134 60.8 59 90 125
MD380-CT110G 160 72.1 70 110 150
MD380-CT132G 192 93.8 91 132 175
MD380-CT180G 240 120.6 117 180 230
MD380-CT200G 250 134 130 200 260
MD380-CT220G 280 152.5 148 220 300
MD380-CT250G 355 161.7 157 250 350
MD380-CT280G 396 186.5 181 280 370
MD380-CT315G 445 206 200 315 420
MD380-CT355G 500 232.8 226 355 470
MD380-CT400G 565 255.5 248 400 530
MD380-CT450G 630 289.5 281 450 600
MD380-CT500G 700 343 333 500 660
MD380-CT560G 784 358.5 348 560 750
MD380-CT630G 882 412 400 630 840
2.4 Technical Specifications
Item Specifications
Standard Vector control: 0-300Hz

Maximum frequency
function V/F control: 0-3200Hz
0.5kHz-16kHz
Carrier frequency The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted according to the
load characteristics.
Input frequency Digital setting: 0.01Hz

resolution Analog setting: maximum frequency ×0.025%
14

Item Specifications
 SVC
Control mode  FVC
 V/F control
 G model: 0.5Hz/150% (SVC); 0Hz/180% (FVC)

Startup torque
 P model: 0.5Hz/100%
Speed adjustment
1:100 (SVC) 1:1000 (FVC)
range
Speed accuracy ±0.5% (SVC) ±0.02% (FVC)
Torque control
±5% (FVC)
accuracy
 G model: 150% rated current 60s; 180% rated current 3s

Overload capacity
 P model: 120% rated current 60s; 150% rated current 3s
 Fixed boost
Torque boost
 Customized boost 0.1%-30.0%
 Straight-line V/F curve

 Multi-point V/F curve
V/F curve
 N-power V/F curve (1.2-power, 1.4-power, 1.6-power,
1.8-power, square)
V/F separation Two types: complete separation; half separation
 Straight-line ramp
 S-curve ramp
Ramp mode
Four kinds of acceleration/deceleration on time with the range of
0.0-6500.0s
DC brake frequency: 0.00Hz-maximum frequency

DC brake Brake time: 0.0s-36.0s
Brake action current value: 0.0%-100.0%
JOG frequency range: 0.00Hz-50.00Hz

JOG control
JOG acceleration/deceleration time: 0.0s-6500.0s
Simple PLC and multi It can realize operation at up to 16 speeds via PLC or control
preset speeds terminal.
It helps to realize process-controlled closed loop control system

Onboard PID
easily.
Auto voltage regulation It can keep constant output voltage automatically in case of
(AVR) change of mains voltage.
Over-voltage/Over-curr The current and voltage are limited automatically during RUN so
ent stall control as to avoid frequent over-voltage/over-current tripping.
15

Item Specifications
It can limit the torque automatically and prevent frequent over

current tripping during RUN.
Torque limit and control
Torque control can be implemented in the closed loop vector
control mode.
Control of asynchronous motor and synchronous motor are

High performance implemented by high-performance current vector control
technology.
The load feedback energy compensates the voltage reduction so

Power dip ride through
that the inverter can continue to run in short time.
Rapid current limit It helps to avoid frequent over-current faults of the inverter.
Virtual I/O Five groups of virtual DI/Dos can realize simple logic control.
Timing control Time range: 0.0Min-6500.0Min
Four motors can be switched over via four groups of motor

Multi-motor switchover
parameters.
Multiple
Individualized It supports communication via Modbus-RTU, Profibus-DP,
communication
function CANlink and CANopen.
protocols
The optional IO extension card enables AI3 to receive the motor

Motor overheated
temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000) so as to realize
protectoon
motor overheated protection.
It supports various encoders such as differential encoder,

Multiple encoder types.
open-collector encoder, rotating transformer and UVW encoder.
The optional programming card helps the user to realize

User programmable
secondary development. Its programming environment is
function
compatible with that of the PLC of Inovance.
It supports the inverter parameter operation and virtual

Advanced background
oscillograph function, via which the state inside the inverter is
software
monitored.
 Operation panel reference

 External terminal reference
RUN Command source
 Serial communication port reference
The sources can be switched over in various modes.
Frequency source There are a total of 10 frequency sources, such as digital

reference, analog voltage reference, pulse reference and serial
communication port reference.
16

Item Specifications
The sources can be switched over in various modes.
Auxiliary frequency There are ten types of auxiliary frequency sources. It can
source implement micro tuning and synthesis of auxiliary frequency.
Standard:
 5 DI terminals, including one supports up to 100kHz
high-speed pulse input5
 2 AI terminals, including one only supports 0-10V voltage
input and the other supports 0-10V voltage input or 4-20mA
Input terminal
current input
Expanding capacity:
 5 DI terminals
 1 AI terminal that supports -10V to 10V voltage input and
PT100\PT1000
Standard
 1 high-speed pulse output terminal (open-collector) that
supports 0-100kHz square wave signal output
 1 DO terminal
 1 relay output terminal
 1 AO terminal that supports 0-20mA current output or
Output terminal
0-10V voltage output
Expanding capacity:
 1 DO terminal
 1 relay output terminal
 1 AO terminal that supports 0-20mA current output or
0-10V voltage output
LED display It can display the parameters.
It is optional and can display Chinese/English operation

LCD display
contents.
Parameters can be cloned quickly via optional LCD operation

Parameter clone
panel.
Display and Key locking and It can lock the keys partially or completely and define the
keyboard function selection function range of some keys so as to prevent misoperation.
operation Motor short-circuit detection at power-on, input/output phase

loss protection, over-current protection, over-voltage protection,
Protection mode
under-voltage protection, overheated protection and overload
protection
LCD operation panel, braking unit, I/O extension card 1, I/O

Optional parts extension card 2, user programmable card, RS485
communication card, Profibus-DP communication card, CANlink
17

Item Specifications
communication card, CANopen communication card, differential

input PG card, UVW differential input PG card, rotary encoder
PG card and OC input PG card.
Indoor and be free from direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas,

Installation location
combustible gas, oil smoke, vapor, drip or salt.
Altitude Lower than 1000m
-10℃ to +40℃ (derated in the ambient temperature of +45℃to

Environment Ambient temperature
+65℃)
Humidity Less than 95%RH, without condensing
Vibration Less than 5.9m/s2 (0.6g)
Storage temperature -20℃ to +60℃
2.5 Physical Appearance and Surface Mounting
2.5.1 Physical Appearance
Figure 2-1 Physical appearance of the MD380 series inverter
18

Figure 2-2 Physical dimensions and surface mounting of MD380 (plastic construction)
Figure 2-3 Physical dimensions and surface mounting of MD380 (metal construction)
The housing construction of various MD380 models is shown as below:
Model Housing Type
Three-phase 220V
0.4kW-2.2kW Plastic construction
Three-phase 220V
0.4kW-7.5kW Plastic construction
11kW-75kW Metal construction
19

Three-phase 380V
0.75kW-15kW Plastic construction
18.5kW-400kW Metal construction
Three-phase 480V
0.75kW-15kW Plastic construction
18.5kW-400kW Metal construction
Three-phase 690V
55kW-560kW Metal construction
2.5.2 MD380 Overall Dimensions and Mounting Hole Dimensions (mm)
Mounting Hole Overall Dimensions Mounting Hole Diameter Weight

Model mm mm mm kg
A B H H1 W D
Single-phase 220V
MD380S0.4GB
MD380S0.7GB
113 172 186 / 125 164 ø5.0 1.1
MD380S1.5GB
MD380S2.2GB
Three-phase 220V
MD380-2T0.4GB
MD380-2T0.75G
113 172 186 / 125 164 ø5.0 1.1
B
MD380-2T1.5GB
MD380-2T2.2GB
148 236 248 / 160 183 ø5.0 2.5
MD380-2T3.7GB
MD380-2T5.5GB
190 305 322 / 208 192 ø6 6.5
MD380-2T7.5GB
MD380-2T11G
235 447 432 463 285 228 Ø6.5 20
MD380-2T15G
MD380-2T18.5G
MD380-2T22G 260 580 549 600 385 265 Ø10 32
MD380-2T30G
20

MD380-2T37G
343 678 660 700 473 307 Ø10 47
MD380-2T45G
MD380-2T55G
449 903 880 930 579 380 Ø10 90
MD380-2T75G
Three-phase 380V
MD380T0.7GB
MD380T1.5GB 113 172 186 / 125 164 ø5.0 1.1
MD380T2.2GB
MD380T3.7GB
MD380T5.5PB
148 236 248 / 160 183 ø5.0 2.5
MD380T5.5GB
MD380T7.5PB
MD380T7.5GB
MD380T11PB
MD380T11GB
190 305 322 / 208 192 ø6 6.5
MD380T15PB
MD380T15GB
MD380T18.5PB
MD380T18.5G
MD380T22P
MD380T22G
235 447 432 463 285 228 Ø6.5 20
MD380T30P
MD380T30G
MD380T37P
MD380T37G
MD380T45P
MD380T45G
260 580 549 600 385 265 Ø10 32
MD380T55P
MD380T55G
MD380T75P
MD380T75G
MD380T90P
343 678 660 700 473 307 Ø10 47
MD380T90G
MD380T110P
MD380T110G
449 903 880 930 579 380 Ø10 90
MD380T132P
21

MD380T132G
MD380T160P
MD380T160G
MD380T110GH
MD380T132PH
MD380T132GH
320 1166 1090 1192 440 310 Ø10 90
MD380T160PH
MD380T160GH
MD380T200PH
MD380T200P
MD380T200G
MD380T220P
MD380T220G
MD380T250P 420 1030 983 1060 650 377 Ø12 130
MD380T250G
MD380T280P
MD380T280G
MD380T315P
MD380T315G
MD380T355P
MD380T355G
520 1300 1203 1358 800 400 Ø16 200
MD380T400P
MD380T400G
MD380T450P
Three-phase 480V
MD380-5T0.7GB
MD380-5T1.5GB 113 172 186 / 125 164 ø5.0 1.1
MD380-5T2.2GB
MD380-5T3.7GB
MD380-5T5.5PB
148 236 248 / 160 183 ø5.0 2.5
MD380-5T5.5GB
MD380-5T7.5PB
MD380-5T7.5GB
190 305 322 / 208 192 ø6 6.5
MD380-5T11PB
MD380-5T11GB
MD380-5T15PB
22

MD380-5T15GB
MD380-5T18.5PB
MD380-5T18.5G
MD380-5T22P
MD380-5T22G
235 447 432 463 285 228 Ø6.5 20
MD380-5T30P
MD380-5T30G
MD380-5T37P
MD380-5T37G
MD380-5T45P
MD380T45G
260 580 549 600 385 265 Ø10 32
MD380T55P
MD380T55G
MD380T75P
MD380-5T75G
MD380-5T90P
343 678 660 700 473 307 Ø10 47
MD380-5T90G
MD380-5T110P
MD380-5T110G
MD380-5T132P
MD380-5T132G 449 903 880 930 579 380 Ø10 90

MD380-5T160P
MD380-5T160G
MD380-5T200P
MD380-5T200G
MD380-5T220P
MD380-5T220G
MD380-5T250P 420 1030 983 1060 650 377 Ø12 130
MD380-5T250G
MD380-5T280P
MD380-5T280G
MD380-5T315P
MD380-5T315G
MD380-5T355P
MD380-5T355G 520 1300 1203 1358 800 400 Ø16 200

MD380-5T400P
MD380-5T400G
23

MD380-5T450P
Three-phase 690V
MD380-7T55G
MD380-7T75P
MD380-7T75G
MD380-7T90P
MD380-7T90G
250 570 557 600 400 330 Ø10 47
MD380-7T110P
MD380-7T110G
MD380-7T132P
MD380-7T132G
MD380-7T160P
MD380-7T160GH
MD380-7T200PH
MD380-7T200GH
MD380-7T220PH
320 1166 1090 1192 440 310 Ø10 90
MD380-7T220GH
MD380-7T250PH
MD380-7T250GH
MD380-7T280PH
MD380-7T280G
MD380-7T315P
MD380-7T315G
420 1030 983 1060 650 377 Ø12 130
MD380-7T355P
MD380-7T355G
MD380-7T400P
MD380-7T400G
MD380-7T450P
MD380-7T450G
520 1300 1203 1358 800 400 Ø16 200
MD380-7T500P
MD380-7T500G
MD380-7T560P
2.5.3 Physical Dimensions of External Keyboard
24

Figure 2-4 Physical dimensions of external keyboard
73.50
63.75
Φ4.00/typ2
99.30
95.00
4.70
9.75
Figure 2-5 Mounting hole dimensions of external keyboard
2.5.4 Dimensions of External DC Reactor
It is noted that the inverter with power of 2.7kW below adopts internal DC reactor.
Figure 2-6 Dimensions of external DC reactor
25

Table 2-1 Adaptable inverter models
Copper Medal
Mounting Reactor
Adaptable Inverter Model A B C D E F G Connecting
Holes Model
Hole Diameter
MD380-2T37G/45G
MD380T75G/90P/90G 160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10*15 Ø12 DCL-0200
MD380-5T75G/90P/90G
MD380-2T55G
MD380T110P/110G/132P 160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10*15 Ø12 DCL-0250
MD380-5T110P/110G/132P
MD380-2T75G
MD380T132G/160P/160G 160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10*15 Ø12 DCL-0360
MD380-5T132G/160P/160G
MD380T200P/200G
/220P/220G/250P
190 230 93 128 250 325 200 13*18 Ø15 DCL-0600
MD380-5T200P/200G
/220P/220G/250P
MD380T250G/280P/280G/315P
MD380-5T250G/280P 190 230 93 128 250 325 200 13*18 Ø15 DCL-0700
/280G/315P
MD380T315G/355P/355G
/400P/400G/450P
224 250 135 165 260 330 235 12*20 Ø14 DCL-1000
MD380-5T315G/355P/355G
/400P/400G/450P
MD380-7T55G/75P Not
/75G/90P/90G/110P configured
160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10*15 Ø12
MD380-7T110G /132P with reactor
/132G/160P now
MD380-7T160GH/200PH
160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10*15 Ø12 DCL-0250
/200GH/220PH
MD380-7T220GH/250PH
/250GH/280PH
160 190 125 161 192 255 195 10*15 Ø12 DCL-0360
MD380-7T280G/315P/315G
/355P/355G/400P
MD380-7T400G/450P/450G
190 230 93 128 250 325 200 13*18 Ø15 DCL-0700
/500P/500G/560P
For special requirements, the user can customize non-standard products.

【Note】
26

 Installation Mode of External DC Reactor

The MD380 series inverters of over 75kW power (2T is 37kW) adopt standard external DC
reactor. Separate wooden cases are used to pack the inverter on delivery. When installing
the inverter, remove the short circuit bronze between main circuit connection terminal P
and (+).
Then install the DC reactor between terminal P and (+). The terminal of reactor and the
inverter terminal P and (+) have no polarity. The short circuit bronze between main circuit
connection terminal P and (+) shall not be used after the installation of DC reactor.
2.6 Optional Parts

If any optional part is needed, please specify them in your order.
Table 2-2 Optional parts of the MD380 series inverter
Name Model Function Remark
Single-phase of 0.4kW-2.2kW and

Internal braking unit is
Letter B behind three phase of 0.75kW-15kW with
Internal braking unit optional for Inverter of
product model internal braking unit is standard
18.5kW-30kW.
configuration.
Inverter of 75kW above

External braking Inverter of 37kW and above adopts
MDBU adopts multi-unit
unit external braking unit.
connection in parallel.
It feeds the regenerative electric

Regen unit MDFB energy in the inverter back to AC
power grid.
It is used in common bus and has

Rectifying unit MDRU
energy saving function.
It can extend 5 DIs, 1 AI (AI3 for

It is applicable to the
separation analog can input PT100,
I/O extension card 1 MD38IO1 models of 3.7kW and
PT1000), 1 relay output, 1 DO and 1
above.
AO with RS485/CAN.
I/O extension card It is applicable to all

MD38IO2 It can extend 3 DIs.
2-Size B models.
RJ45 is compatible with

RS232 communication interface the terminal interface.
1) MD32-232
MODBUS without separation It is adaptable to all
models.
communication card
RS485 communication adapter with It is applicable to all
2) MD38TX1
separation. models.
CANlink
It is applicable to all
communication MD38CAN1 CANlink communication adapter
models.
extension card
27

Name Model Function Remark
CANopen
It is applicable to all
communication MD38CAN2 CANopen communication adapter
models.
extension card
It is applicable to
Profbus-DP
MD38DP Profbus-DP communication card models of 3.7kW and
communication card
above.
It is applicable to
User programmable Compatible to Inovance’s H1U
MD38PC1 models of 3.7kW and
card series PLC.
above.
Differential encoder It is applicable to all

MD38PG1 Adaptable to 5V power supply
interface card models.
Suitable for UVW differential

UVW encoder encoder and applicable to It is applicable to all
MD38PG3
interface card synchronous motor models.
Adaptable to 5V power supply
Rotaty encoder Applicable to rotary encoder, 10kHz It is applicable to all

MD38PG4
interface card excitation frequency, DB9 interface models.
Open-collector
With 1:1 frequency division output It is applicable to all
encoder interface MD38PG5
Adaptable to 15V power supply models.
card
It is applicable to the
External LED
MDKE External LED display and keyboard MD series.
operation panel
RJ45 interface
Hand-held LCD It allows parameter

MDKE4 External LCD display and keyboard
operator clone.
It is standard 8-core cable and can The standard

Extension cable MDCAB be connected to MDKE, MD32KC configuration is 3
and MDCP. meters.
2.7 Routine Repair and Maintenance of Inverter
2.7.1 Routine Maintenance
The influence of the ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will cause the
aging of the devices in the inverter, which may cause potential fault of the inverter or
reduce the service life of the inverter. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out routine and
periodical maintenance.
Routine maintenance involves:
28

 Whether the motor sounds abnormally during RUN.
 Whether the motor has vibration during RUN.
 Whether the installation environment of the inverter changes.
 Whether the inverter’s cooling fan works normally.
 Whether the inverter is overheated.
Routine cleaning involves:
 The inverter shall be kept clean all the time.
 The dust on the surface of the inverter shall be effectively removed, so as to prevent
the dust from entering the inverter. Especially the metal dust is not allowed.
 The oil stain on the inverter’s cooling fan shall be effectively removed.
2.7.2 Periodic Inspection
Please perform periodic inspection on the places where the inspection is a difficult thing.
Periodic inspection involves:
 Check and clean the air duct periodically.
 Check whether the screws become loose.
 Check whether the inverter is corroded.
 Check whether the wiring terminal has arc signs;
 Main circuit insulation test
Before measuring the insulating resistance with megameter (DC 500V

megameter recommended), disconnect the main circuit from the
inverter. Do not use the insulating resistance meter to test the
insulation of the control circuit. And high voltage test that has been
completed upon delivery is unnecessary.
2.7.3 Replacement of Wearing Parts
The wearing parts of the inverter are cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor. Their
service life is related to the operating environment and maintenance status. Generally, the
service life is shown as follows:
Part Service Life Possible Damage Reason Judging Criteria
 Bearing is worn  Whether there is crack on the

 Blade is aging blade
Fan 2 to 3 years
 Whether there is abnormal
vibration noise upon startup
Electrolytic 4 to 5 years  Input power supply in  Whether there is liquid leakage.
29

capacitor poor quality,  Whether the safe valve has

 High ambient projected.
temperature  Measure the static capacitance.
 Frequent load jumping  Measure the insulating
 Electrolytic aging. resistance.
2.8 Instructions on Warranty of Inverter

Free warranty only applies to the inverter itself.
1. Our company will provide 18-month warranty (starting from the leave-factory date as
indicated on the barcode) for the failure or damage under normal use conditions. If
the equipment has been used for over 18 months, reasonable repair expenses will be
charged.
2. Reasonable repair expenses will be charged for the following situations within 18
months:
 The equipment is damaged because the user fails to comply with the
requirements of the user’s manual.
 The damage is caused by fire, flood or abnormal voltage.
 The damage caused when the inverter is used for abnormal function.
 The service expenses will be calculated according to the standard of the

manufacturer. If there is any agreement, the agreement shall prevail.
2.9 Selection of Braking Resistor Values

Table 2-2 below provides data for reference. The user can select different
【Note】
resistance and power based on actual needs. But the resistance shall not
be lower than the recommended value. The power may be higher than the
recommended value.
Selection of brake resistor shall be determined in accordance with the power generated by
the motor in the actual application system and is associated with the system inertia,
deceleration time and energy of potential load. Higher the system inertia is, shorter
deceleration time is required, and more frequent the braking is. Then brake resistor with
higher power and lower resistance value should be selected.
2.9.1 Selection of Resistance Value
The motor’s regenerative energy is almost consumed on the brake resistor when braking.
According to the formula U*U/R=Pb,
 U refers to the braking voltage at system stable braking.
Different systems select different braking voltages. The 380VAC system usually
selects 700V braking voltage.
30

 Pb refers to the braking power.
2.9.2 Selection of Power
In theory, the power of brake resistor is consistent with the braking power. But consider
that the derating is 70%.
According to the formula 0.7*Pr=Pb*D,
 Pr refers to the power of resistor.
 D refers to the braking frequency (percentage of the regenerative process to the

whole working process)
− Lift: 20%-30%
− Winding and unwinding: 20-30%
− Centrifuge: 50%-60%
− Occasional brake load: 5%
− Generally: 10%
Table 2-2 Selection of braking resistor values
Recommended Recommended
Model Braking Unit Remark
Power Resistance
Single-phase 220V
MD380S0.4GB 80W ≥200Ω
MD380S0.7GB 80W ≥150Ω Internal No special
MD380S1.5GB 100W ≥100Ω (standard) description
MD380S2.2GB 100W ≥70Ω
Three-phase 220V
MD380-2T0.4GB 150W ≥150Ω
MD380-2T0.75GB 150W ≥110Ω
MD380-2T1.1GB 250W ≥100Ω
Internal No special
MD380-2T2.2GB 300W ≥65Ω
(standard) description
MD380-2T3.7GB 400W ≥45Ω
MD380-2T5.5GB 800W ≥22Ω
MD380-2T7.5GB 1000W ≥16Ω
MD380-2T11G 1500W ≥11Ω Internal Letter B behind
MD380-2T15G 2500W ≥8Ω (optional) inverter model
MD380-2T18.5G 3.7 kW ≥8.0Ω External MDBU-35-A
MD380-2T22G 4.5 kW ≥8Ω External MDBU-35-A
MD380-2T45G 4.5 kW×2 ≥4Ω×2 External MDBU-70-A×2
MD380-2T55G 5.5 kW×2 ≥4Ω×2 External MDBU-70-A×2
31

Power Resistance
MD380-2T75G 16kW ≥1.2Ω External MDBU-200-A
Three-phase 380V
MD380T0.7GB 150W ≥300Ω
MD380T1.5GB 150W ≥220Ω
MD380T2.2GB 250W ≥200Ω
MD380T3.7GB 300W ≥130Ω Internal No special
MD380T5.5GB 400W ≥90Ω (standard) description
MD380T7.5GB 500W ≥65Ω
MD380T11GB 800W ≥43Ω
MD380T15GB 1000W ≥32Ω
MD380T18.5 1300W ≥25Ω
Internal Letter B behind
MD380T22 1500W ≥22Ω
(optional) inverter model
MD380T30 2500W ≥16Ω
MD380T37 3.7 kW ≥16.0Ω External MDBU-35-B
MD380T45 4.5 kW ≥16Ω External MDBU-35-B
MD380T90 4.5 kW×2 ≥8Ω×2 External MDBU-70-B×2
MD380T160 16kW ≥2.5Ω External MDBU-200-B
MD380T200 20 kW ≥2.5Ω External MDBU-200-B
MD380T220 22 kW ≥2.5Ω External MDBU-200-B
MD380T250 12.5 kW×2 ≥2.5Ω×2 External MDBU-200-B×2
MD380T280 14kW×2 ≥2.5Ω×2 External MDBU-200-B×2
MD380T400 14 kW×3 ≥2.5Ω×3 External MDBU-200-B×3
Three-phase 480V
MD380-5T0.7GB 150W ≥300Ω
MD380-5T1.5GB 150W ≥220Ω
MD380-5T2.2GB 250W ≥200Ω
MD380-5T3.7GB 300W ≥130Ω Internal No special
MD380-5T5.5GB 400W ≥90Ω (standard) description
MD380-5T7.5GB 500W ≥65Ω
MD380-5T11GB 800W ≥43Ω
MD380-5T15GB 1000W ≥32Ω
MD380-5T18.5 1300W ≥25Ω
Internal Letter B behind
MD380-5T22 1500W ≥22Ω
(optional) inverter model
MD380-5T30 2500W ≥16Ω
32

Power Resistance
MD380-5T37 3.7 kW ≥16.0Ω External MDBU-35-D
MD380-5T45 4.5 kW ≥16Ω External MDBU-35-D
MD380-5T90 4.5 kW×2 ≥8Ω×2 External MDBU-70-D×2
MD380-5T160 16kW ≥2.5Ω External MDBU-200-D
MD380-5T200 20 kW ≥2.5Ω External MDBU-200-D
MD380-5T220 22 kW ≥2.5Ω External MDBU-200-D
MD380-5T250 12.5 kW×2 ≥2.5Ω×2 External MDBU-200-D×2
MD380-5T280 14kW×2 ≥2.5Ω×2 External MDBU-200-D×2
MD380-5T400 14 kW×3 ≥2.5Ω×3 External MDBU-200-D×3
“×2” indicates two braking units with their respective braking resistor
【Note】
connected in parallel. “×3” means the same.
33

Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.1 Mechanical Installation
3.1.1 Installation Environment
Item Requirement
Ambient temperature -10℃ to 50℃
Heat radiation Mount the inverter on the surface of incombustible bodies with sufficient
room surrounding for heat sinking.
Install the inverter on the base with screws vertically.
Mounting location Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Vibration Less than 0.6G
Far away from the punching machine or the like
 Installation of single unit

If the inverter power is 22 kW or less, size A is ignored. If the inverter power is 22kW
or more, size A shall be greater than 50mm.
 Up and down installation of two units
It two inverters are installed, the insulating splitter is required.
Surrounding Clearances
Power Class
B A
≤15kW ≥100mm No requirement
18.5kW-30kW ≥200mm ≥50mm
≥37kW ≥300mm ≥50mm
34

3.1.2 Heat Radiation
Heat radiation shall be taken into consideration during the mechanical installation. Please
pay attention to the following items:
 Please install the inverter vertically so that the heat radiates to the top. But the
equipment cannot be installed upside down. To encase multiple inverters, install them
in line vertically. If up and down installation is required, install the insulating splitter.
 Refer to the surrounding clearances to ensure the heat radiation room. Meanwhile,
consider the heat radiation conditions of other devices in the cabinet.
 The installation bracket must be flame-retardant.
 In the applications with metal dusts, install the radiator outside the cabinet. In this
case, the space in the sealed cabinet shall be large enough.
3.1.3 Removing the Cover
The MD series inverter of 15kW or less uses plastic cover. To remove the cover, press the
hook with the tool, shown as below:
The MD series inverter of 18.5kW or more uses metal cover. Loosen the installation
screws to remove the cover, shown as below:
Loosen two
installation screws
Cover
Pull the cover

toward you
Raise the
cover
35

Prevent the cover from falling off during the removal. Otherwise,
damage to the equipment or personal injury may result.
3.2 Electrical Installation
3.2.1 Selection of External Electrical Parts
Cable of Input Cable of Output Cable of Control

MCCB Contactor
Inverter Model Side Main Circuit Side Main Circuit Circuit
(A) (A) 2 2
(mm ) (mm ) (mm2)
Single-phase 220V
MD380S0.4GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380S0.7GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380S1.5GB 20 16 4.0 2.5 1.0
MD380S2.2GB 32 20 6.0 4.0 1.0
Three-phase 220V
MD380-2T0.4GB 10 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380-2T0.75GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380-2T1.1GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380-2T2.2GB 25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-2T3.7GB 32 25 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-2T5.5GB 63 40 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-2T7.5GB 63 40 6.0 6.0 1.0
MD380-2T11G 100 63 10 10 1.5
MD380-2T15G 125 100 16 10 1.5
MD380-2T18.5G 160 100 16 16 1.5
MD380-2T22G 200 125 25 25 1.5
MD380-2T30G 200 125 35 25 1.5
MD380-2T37G 250 160 50 35 1.5
MD380-2T45G 250 160 70 35 1.5
MD380-2T55G 350 350 120 120 1.5
MD380-2T75G 500 400 185 185 1.5
Three-phase 380V
MD380T0.7GB 10 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
36


MCCB Contactor
(A) (A) 2 2
(mm ) (mm ) (mm2)
MD380T1.5GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380T2.2GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380T3.7GB 25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380T5.5 GB
32 25 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380T7.5PB
MD380T7.5 GB
40 32 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380T11 PB
MD380T11 GB
63 40 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380T15PB
MD380T15GB
63 40 6.0 6.0 1.0
MD380T18.5PB
MD380T18.5G
100 63 6 6 1.5
MD380T22P
MD380T22G
100 63 10 10 1.5
MD380T30P
MD380T30G
125 100 16 10 1.5
MD380T37P
MD380T37G
160 100 16 16 1.5
MD380T45P
MD380T45G
200 125 25 25 1.5
MD380T55P
MD380T55G
200 125 35 25 1.5
MD380T75P
MD380T75G
250 160 50 35 1.5
MD380T90P
MD380T90G
250 160 70 35 1.5
MD380T110P
MD380T110G
350 350 120 120 1.5
MD380T132P
MD380T132G
400 400 150 150 1.5
MD380T160P
MD380T160G
500 400 185 185 1.5
MD380T200P
MD380T200G
600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380T220P
37


MCCB Contactor
(A) (A) 2 2
(mm ) (mm ) (mm2)
MD380T220G
600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380T250P
MD380T250G
800 600 185*2 185*2 1.5
MD380T280P
MD380T280G
800 800 185*2 185*2 1.5
MD380T315P
MD380T315G
800 800 150*3 150*3 1.5
MD380T355P
MD380T355G
800 800 150*4 150*4 1.5
MD380T400P
MD380T400G
1000 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5
MD380T450P
Three-phase 480V
MD380-5T0.7GB 10 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380-5T1.5GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380-5T2.2GB 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
MD380-5T3.7GB
25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-5T5.5PB
MD380-5T5.5GB
32 25 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-5T7.5PB
MD380-5T7.5GB
40 32 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-5T11PB
MD380-5T11GB
63 40 4.0 4.0 1.0
MD380-5T15PB
MD380-5T15GB
63 40 6.0 6.0 1.0
MD380-5T18.5PB
MD380-5T18.5G
100 63 6 6 1.5
MD380-5T22P
MD380-5T22G
100 63 10 10 1.5
MD380-5T30P
MD380-5T30G
125 100 16 10 1.5
MD380-5T37P
MD380-5T37G
160 100 16 16 1.5
MD380-5T45P
38


MCCB Contactor
(A) (A) 2 2
(mm ) (mm ) (mm2)
MD380-5T45G
200 125 25 25 1.5
MD380-5T55P
MD380-5T55G
200 125 35 25 1.5
MD380-5T75P
MD380-5T75G
250 160 50 35 1.5
MD380-5T90P
MD380-5T90G
250 160 70 35 1.5
MD380-5T110P
MD380-5T110G
350 350 120 120 1.5
MD380-5T132P
MD380-5T132G
400 400 150 150 1.5
MD380-5T160P
MD380-5T160G
500 400 185 185 1.5
MD380-5T200P
MD380-5T200G
600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-5T220P
MD380-5T220G
600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-5T250P
MD380-5T250G
800 600 185*2 185*2 1.5
MD380-5T280P
MD380-5T280G
800 800 185*2 185*2 1.5
MD380-5T315P
MD380-5T315G
800 800 150*3 150*3 1.5
MD380-5T355P
MD380-5T355G
800 800 150*4 150*4 1.5
MD380-5T400P
MD380-5T400G
1000 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5
MD380-5T450P
Three-phase 690V
MD380-7T55G
125 100 16 16 1.5
MD380-7T75P
MD380-7T75G
200 125 25 25 1.5
MD380-7T90P
MD380-7T90G
200 160 35 35 1.5
MD380-7T110P
39


MCCB Contactor
(A) (A) 2 2
(mm ) (mm ) (mm2)
MD380-7T110G
250 160 50 50 1.5
MD380-7T132P
MD380-7T132G
250 200 50 50 1.5
MD380-7T160P
MD380-7T160G
300 250 70 70 1.5
MD380-7T200P
MD380-7T200G
350 350 120 120 1.5
MD380-7T220P
MD380-7T220G
400 400 150 150 1.5
MD380-7T250P
MD380-7T250G
400 400 150 150 1.5
MD380-7T280P
MD380-7T280G
500 400 185 185 1.5
MD380-7T315P
MD380-7T315G
600 500 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-7T355P
MD380-7T355G
600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-7T400P
MD380-7T400G
600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-7T450P
MD380-7T450G
800 600 185*2 185*2 1.5
MD380-7T500P
MD380-7T500G
1000 800 150*3 150*3 1.5
MD380-7T560P
Three-phase 1140V
MD380-CT37 63 40 4 4 1.0
MD380-CT45 63 40 6 6 1.0
MD380-CT55 100 63 6 6 1.5
MD380-CT75 100 100 16 10 1.5
MD380-CT90 125 100 16 16 1.5
MD380-CT110 160 125 16 16 1.5
MD380-CT132 200 160 25 25 1.5
MD380-CT180 200 160 35 35 1.5
MD380-CT200 250 200 50 50 1.5
40


MCCB Contactor
(A) (A) 2 2
(mm ) (mm ) (mm2)
MD380-CT220 250 200 50 50 1.5
MD380-CT250 250 200 50 50 1.5
MD380-CT280 300 250 70 70 1.5
MD380-CT315 350 350 120 120 1.5
MD380-CT355 350 350 150 150 1.5
MD380-CT400 400 400 150 150 1.5
MD380-CT450 500 400 185 185 1.5
MD380-CT500 500 500 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-CT560 600 500 150*2 150*2 1.5
MD380-CT630 600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
3.2.2 Description of External Electrical Parts
Part Mounting Location Function Description
Break off the power supply when over-current occurs to

MCCB Power receiving side
downstream devices
Start and stop the inverter.

Between MCCB and Do not start and stop the inverter frequently by switching on and
Contactor
inverter input side off the contactor (less than twice per minute) or directly start the
inverter.
1. Improve the power factor of the input side;

2. Eliminate the higher harmonics of the input side effectively
AC input and prevent other device from being damaged due to
Inverter input side
reactor distortion of voltage wave.
3. Eliminate the input current unbalance due to unbalance
between the power phases.
1. Reduce the external conduction and radiation interference

of the inverter.
EMC Input
Inverter input side 2. Decrease the conduction interference flowing from the
filter
power end to the inverter and improve the
anti-interference capacity of the inverter.
1. Improve the power factor of the input side;

MD series inverter of
2. Improve the efficiency and thermal stability of the inverter.
7.5G or more configured
DC reactor 3. Eliminate the impact of higher harmonics of the inverter
with DC reactor as
input side and reduce the external conduction and
standard
radiation interference.
41

The inverter output side generally has higher harmonics. When

the motor is far from the inverter, there are much distributed
capacitance in the circuit and certain harmonics may cause
resonance in the circuit, bringing about the following two
Between inverter output impacts:
AC output
side and the motor, close  Degrade the motor insulation performance and damage the
reactor
to the inverter motor for the long run.
 Generate large leakage current and cause frequent
inverter protection.
If the inverter is more than 100m far away from the motor, install
the AC output reactor.
3.2.3 Wiring of Inverter Main Circuit
Single-phase 220V 15kW or Less Three-phase 220V
18.5 kW-30kW Three-phase 220V 37kW or More Three-phase 220V
30kW or Less Three-phase 380/480V 37-55kW Three-phase 380/480V
42

75kW or More Three-phase 380/480V Three-phase 690V
3.2.4 Description of Main Circuit Terminals
 Description of Main Circuit Terminals of Single-phase Inverter
Terminal Name Description

Single-phase power Connect to single-phase AC 220V power
L1, L2
supply input terminals supply.
Positive and negative
(+), (-) Common DC bus input point
terminal of DC bus
Connecting terminals
(+), PB Connect to a braking resistor.
of braking resistor
Inverter output
U, V, W Connect to a three-phase motor.
terminals
Grounding terminal Must be grounding.
 Description of Main Circuit Terminals of Three-phase Inverter
Terminal Name Description

Single-phase power
R, S, T Connect to three-phase AC power supply
supply input terminals
Positive and negative Common DC bus input point
(+), (-)
terminal of DC bus Connect external braking unit to the inverter of
43

18.5kW or more (220V) and 37kW and more

(other voltage classes).
Connect braking resistor with the inverter of
Connecting terminals of
(+), PB 15kW or less (220V) and 30kW or less (other
braking resistor
voltage classes).
Connecting terminals of
P, (+) Connect to external reactor.
external reactor
Inverter output
U, V, W Connect to a three-phase motor.
terminals
Grounding terminal Must be grounding.
 Precautions on the Wiring
1. Power input terminals L1, L2 or R, S, T
The cable connection at the inverter input side has no phase sequence requirement.
2. DC bus (+), (-)
− Terminals (+) and (-) of DC bus have residual voltage after the inverter is
switched off. After indicator CHARGE become off, wait at least 10 minutes and
then start wiring. Otherwise, you may get electric shock.
− When selecting external braking unit for the inverter of 18.5kW or more (220V)
and 37kW or more (other voltage classes), do not reverse poles (+) and (-).
Otherwise, it may damage the inverter and even cause a fire.
− The cable length of the braking unit shall be no longer than 10m. Use twisted pair
wire or pair wires for parallel connection.
− Do not connect the braking resistor directly to the DC bus, or it may damage the
inverter and even cause fire.
3. Braking resistor connecting terminals (+), PB
− The connecting terminals of the braking resistor are effective only for the inverter
of 30kW or less with internal braking unit.
− The cable length of the braking resistor shall be less than 5m. Otherwise, it may
damage the inverter.
4. External reactor connecting terminals P, (+)
For the inverter of 37kW or more (220V) and 75kW or more (other voltage classes),
remove the jumper across terminals P and (+) and install the reactor between the two
terminals.
5. Inverter output terminals U, V, W
− The capacitor or surge absorber cannot be connected to the inverter output side.
Otherwise, it may cause frequent inverter protection or even damage the
44

inverter.
− If the motor cable is too long, electrical resonance will be generated due to the
impact of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or
generating higher leakage current to cause the inverter over-current protection. If
the motor cable is ove-100m long, install an AC output reactor nearby the
inverter.
6. Grounding terminal PE
− This terminal shall be earthed reliably. The resistance of the grounding cable
must be less than 0.1Ω. Otherwise, it may cause fault or damage to the inverter.
− Do not share the earth terminal and the N terminal of the power supply zero line.
3.2.5 Wiring of Inverter Control Circuit
All the MD380 series inverters have the same wiring mode. The figure
【Note】
here shows the wiring of single-phase 220V inverter. ◎ indicates main
circuit terminal, while ○ indicates control circuit terminal.
3.2.6 Description of Control Circuit Terminals
 Terminal Arrangement of Control Circuit

45

+10V AI1 AI2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 COM
GND GND AO1 CME COM DO1 FM +24V OP T/A T/B T/C
 Description of Control Circuit Terminals
Type Terminal Name Function Description
Provide +10V power supply to external unit. Generally, it

provides power supply to external potentiometer with
External +10V
+10V-GND resistance range of 1kΩ-5kΩ.
power supply
Maximum output current: 10mA

Power supply
External +24V provides power supply to DI/DO terminals and external

+24V-COM
power supply sensors.

Connect to +24V by default.
Input terminal of
When you want to drive DI1-DI5 by external signal, OP needs
OP external power
to be connected to external power supply and be
supply
disconnected from +24V.
1. Input voltage range: DC 0V to 10V

AI1-GND Analog input 1
2. Resistance input: 100kΩ
Analog input
1. Input range: 0V-10V/4mA-20mA, decided by jumper J8

on the control board
AI2-GND Analog input 2
2. Resistance input: 22kΩ (voltage input), 500Ω (current
input)
DI1- OP Digital input 1 1. Optical coupling isolation, compatible with dual polarity
DI2- OP Digital input 2 input
DI3- OP Digital input 3 2. Resistance input: 2.4kΩ

Digital input
DI4- OP Digital input 4 3. Voltage range for level input: 9V-30V
Besides characteristics of DI1-DI4, it can be used as

High-speed pulse
DI5- OP high-speed pulse input channel.
input
Maximum input frequency:100kHz
Voltage or current output is decided by J5 jumper.

Analog
output
AO1-GND Analog output 1 Output voltage range: 0V-10V

Output current range: 0mA-20mA
46

Type Terminal Name Function Description
1. Optical coupling isolation, dual polarity open collector

output
2. Output voltage range: 0V-24V
3. Output current range: 0mA-50mA
DO1-CME Digital output 1
Note that CME and COM are internally insulated, but they are
Digital output
connected by jumper externally. At this time DO1 is driven by

+24V by default. If you want to drive DO1 by external power
supply, remove the jumper.
It is limited by F5-00 (FM terminal output mode selection).

 As high-speed pulse output, the maximum frequency
High-speed pulse
FM- COM hits 100kHz.
output
 As open-collector output, its specification is the same as
that of DO1
Normally closed
Relay output
T/A-T/B Contact driving capacity:

terminal
AC250V, 3A, COSø=0.4
Normally open
T/A-T/C DC 30V, 1A
terminal
Extension card Interface of 28-core terminal and optional cards (I/O extension
Auxiliary interface
J12
interface card, PLC card and various bus cards)
J3 PG card interface OC, differential, UVW and rotary encoders can be selected.
External keyboard
J7 Connect to external keyboard.
interface
 Description of Wiring of Signal Terminals
1. Wiring of analog input terminals
Because weak analog voltage signal is easy to suffer external interferences, select
shielded cable generally and the cable shall be 20m at longest. Shown as below:
In applications that the analog signal is subject to severe interference, install filter
capacitor or ferrite magnetic core at the analog signal source, shown as below:.
47

2. Wiring of digital input terminals
Generally, select shielded cable generally and the cable shall be 20m at longest. When
active driving is adopted, necessary filtering measures shall be taken to prevent the
interference to the power supply. It is recommended to use the contact control mode.
a) SINK wiring
This is the most commonly used wiring mode. To apply external power supply, remove
jumpers between +24V and OP and between COM and CME, and connect the positive
pole of external power supply to OP and negative pole to CME.
b) SOURCE wiring
48

In such wiring mode, remove the jumper between +24V and OP. Connect +24V to the
common port of external controller and meanwhile connect OP to COM. If external power
supply is applied, remove the jumper between CME and COM.
3. Wiring of digital output terminal
When the digital output terminal needs to drive the relay, an absorption diode shall be
installed between two sides of the relay coil. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the DC
24V power supply. The driving capacity is no more than 50mA.
Do not reverse the polarity of the absorption diode during installation,

【Note】
shown as below. Otherwise, the DC 24V power supply will be damaged
immediately once there is digital output.
49

Chapter 4 Operation and Display
4.1 Operation Panel

You can modify the inverter parameters, monitor the inverter working status and run/stop
the inverter via the operation panel shown as below:
Forward/Reverse
rotation indicator
Operation mode indicator
ON: Reverse rotation
ON: Local control
OFF: Remote control OFF: Forward rotation
RUN indicator Tune/Fault indicator
Digital display
Unit indicator
Enter key
Programming key
Up key
Down key
Menu key
Shift key
Run key Stop/Reset key
Multi-function key

4.1.1 Description of Indicators
 RUN
OFF indicates that the inverter is in the stop status, and ON indicates that the inverter
is in the running status.
 LOCAL/REMOT：
It indicates whether the inverter is operated via operation panel, terminals or

communication.
LOCAL/REMOT: OFF Operation panel
LOCAL/REMOT: ON Terminals
50

LOCAL/REMOT: flashing Communication
 FWD/REV：
OFF indicates forward rotation, and ON indicates reverse rotation.
 TUNE/TC：
OFF indicates that the inverter is in the torque control mode, slow flashing indicates
that the inverter is in the tuning status, and quick flashing indicates that the inverter is
in the fault status.
 Unit Indicators(● Indicates ON, ○ Indicates OFF)
4.1.2 Digital Display
The 5-digit LED display is able to display the set frequency, output frequency, monitoring
data and fault codes.
4.1.3 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel
Key Name Function
PRG Programming key Enter or exit Level I menu.
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the parameter
ENTER Confirm key
setting.
Increase key Increase data or function code.
Decrease key Decrease data or function code.
Select the displayed parameters in turn on the stop display interface

Shift key and running display interface, and select the modification digit of
parameters when modifying parameters.
RUN Run key Press this key to run the inverter in the operation panel control mode.
Press this key to stop the running in the running status and reset the
STOP/RES Stop/Reset key operation in the fault status. This function is limited by function code
F7-02.
MF.K Multi-function key Press this key to switch the function based on F7-01. You can select
51

command source or perform quick direction switchover via this key.
Menu mode Press this key to switch over the menu mode according to FP-03.
QUICK
selection key (The function code menu is displayed by default.）
4.2 How to Query and Modify Function Codes

MD380’s operation panel adopts three-level menu, convenient for quick querying and
modification of parameters.
The three-level menu consists of function code group number (Level I), function code
(Level II), and function code value (level III), shown as below:
You can return to Level II from Level III by pressing PRG or ENTER:
 After you press ENTER, the system saves parameter setting first, and then goes
back to Level II and shift to the next function code.
 After you press PRG, the system does not save parameter setting, but directly
returns to Level II and keeps staying at the current function code.
Here is an example of changing the value of F3-02 from 10.00Hz to 15.00Hz:
In Level III menu, if the parameter has no flashing bit, it means that the parameter cannot
be modified. This may be because:
 Such function code is readable parameter, like inverter type, actually detected
parameter and running record parameter.
 Such function code cannot be modified in the running status and can only be
changed after the inverter stops.
52

4.3 Function Code Structure

MD380, an advanced product based on MD320, increases some functions in group F and
adds group A and group U.
Function Code Group Function Description

F0-FP Standard inverter Compatible with MD320 series function codes
function codes and adding some function codes
A0-AC Advanced function Multi-motor parameters, AI/AO correction,
codes optimized control, PLC card.
U0-U3 Running status Display of inverter basic parameters
function codes
In the function code display status, select the desired function code via key / , shown
as below:
FP-02 is used to control whether group A and group U are displayed.
Function Code Name Setting Range Default

F0-FP Whether group A and Unit’s digit: group U display selection 11
group U are displayed. 0: Not display
1: Display
Ten’s digit: group A display selection
0: Not display
1: Display
4.4 Quick Querying

MD380 provides you with two quick modes of querying the desired function codes.
1. The user can define up to 30 function codes and combine them into group FE.
2. MD380 automatically list the modified function codes.
53

Thus the operation panel provides three querying modes: base mode, user defined mode
and user modified mode, shown as below:
Function Code Display Mode Display

Base mode
User defined mode
User modified mode
The three function code display modes are switched over via key QUICK. After entering
the function code group, the querying and modification of the function codes are the same
as previous operations.
FP-03 is used to control whether user defined group and user modified group are
displayed.

FP-03 Whether group A and 11
group display selection
group U are displayed.
0: Not display
1: Display
Ten’s digit: display selection

0: Not display
1: Display
It indicates all MD380’s function codes. After entering , level I menu is displayed.
Then query or modify the function codes as described in section 4.4.
The user defined menu is set to facilitate the user to quickly query and modify commonly
used function codes. The display of parameter in the user defined menu like uF3.02
indicates function code F3-02. Modification of parameter in user defined menu has the
54

same effect as the modification in common status. After entering , level II menu is
displayed.
The user defined parameters are combined in group FE. If FE is set to F0.00, it indicates
that no function codes are combined. A maximum of 30 parameters can be combined. If
NULL is displayed, it indicates that the user defined menu is null.
A total of 16 parameters are stored in the user defined menu after initialization, shown as
below:
F0-01 1st motor control mode F3-01 Torque boost
F0-02 Command source selection F4-00 DI1 function selection
F0-03 Main frequency source X selection F4-01 DI2 function selection
F0-07 Frequency source selection F4-02 DI3 function selection
F0-08 Preset frequency F5-04 DO1 output selection
F0-17 Acceleration time 1 F5-07 AO1 output selection
F0-18 Deceleration time 1 F6-00 Startup mode
F3-00 V/F curve setting F6-10 Stop mode
The user can edit the user defined menu based on the actual needs.

In the user modified menu, only the parameters that are modified to non-default value are
listed. The list is generated by the inverter automatically. after entering , level II
menu is displayed.
4.5 Querying Status Parameters

In the stop or running status, parameters in multiple statuses can be displayed by pressing
the shift key .it can display multiple status parameters. You can select whether to
display the parameter through function codes F7-03 (running parameters 1), F7-04
(running parameters 2) and F7-05 (stop parameters) according to selection of the binary
bits.
In the stop status, a total of 16 stop status parameters can be selected.
Bit00: Running frequency (Hz), Bit01: Bus voltage

(V), Bit02: DI input status, Bit03: DO output status,
LED displaying Bit04: AI1 voltage (V), Bit05: AI2 voltage (V), Bit06:
F7-05 33 ☆
stop parameters AI3 voltage (V), Bit07: Counting value, Bit08: Length
value, Bit09: PLC stage, Bit10: Load speed, Bit11:
PID setting, Bit12: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
In the running status, five running status parameters are always displayed, namely,
running frequency, set frequency, bus voltage, output voltage and output current. Whether
the other parameters are displayed is determined by the setting of F7-03 and F7-04.
LED Bit00: Running frequency 1(Hz), Bit01: Set frequency (Hz),

F7-03 1F ☆
displaying Bit02: Bus voltage (V), Bit03: output voltage (V), Bit04: Output
55

running current (A), Bit05: Output power (kW), Bit06: Output torque (%),
parameters 1 Bit07: DI input status, Bit08: DO output status, Bit09: AI1 voltage
(V), Bit10: AI2 voltage (V), Bit11: AI3 voltage (V), Bit12: Counting
value, Bit13: Length value, Bit14: Load speed display, Bit15: PID
setting
Bit00: PID feedback, Bit01: PLC stage, Bit02: Pulse input

frequency (kHz), Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz), Bit04:
Remaining running time, Bit05: AI1 voltage before correction (V),
LED Bit06: AI2 voltage before correction
displaying (V), Bit07: AI3 voltage before correction (V), Bit08: Linear speed,
F7-04 0 ☆
running Bit09: Current power-on time (Hour), Bit10: Current running time
parameters 2 (Min), Bit11: PULSE input frequency (Hz), Bit12: Communication
setting value, Bit13: Encoder feedback speed (Hz), Bit14: Main
frequency X display (Hz), Bit15: Auxiliary frequency Y display
(Hz)
When the inverter is re-powered on after power failure, the displayed parameters are the
parameters selected before the power failure by default.
4.6 Password Setting

The inverter provides user password protection function. When FP-00 is set to non-zero
value, the value is the user password. The password protection becomes valid after
exiting the function code editing status. When pressing PRG key again, “------“ will be
displayed, and common menu cannot be entered until user password is input correctly.
To cancel the password protection function, enter with password and set FP-00 to “0”.
4.7 Motor Tuning

If you select vector control, motor nameplate parameters must be input correctly. The
vector control mode is dependent on the motor parameters. To implement better control
performance, correct motor parameters must be obtained.
To perform motor tuning, do as follows:
1. Set the command source (F0-02) to operation panel.
2. Input the following parameters based on the actually selected motor.
Motor Parameter
Motor 1 F1-00: Motor type selection; F1-01: Rated power
F1-02: Rated voltage; F1-03: Rated current
F1-04: Rated frequency; F1-05: Rated rotating speed
Motor 2 A2-00 to A2-05, defined the same as F1-00 to F1-05.
Motor3 A3-00 to A3-05, defined the same as F1-00 to F1-05.
56

For asynchronous motor, if the motor can be disconnected from the load, set F1-37
(Tuning selection) to 2 (Asynchronous motor complete tuning). Then press the key RUN
on the operation panel. The inverter will automatically calculate the value of the following
motor parameters:
Motor Parameter
Motor 1 F1-06: Stator resistance (asynchronous motor); F1-07: Rotor
resistance (asynchronous motor); F1-08: Leakage inductive
reactance (asynchronous motor): F1-09: Mutual inductive reactance
(asynchronous motor); F1-10: No-load current (asynchronous motor)
Motor3 A3-06 to A3-10, defined the same as F1-06 to F1-10.
If the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, set F1-37 (Tuning selection) to 1
(Asynchronous motor static tuning) and then press the key RUN on the operation panel.
57

Chapter 5 Function Code Table
If FP-00 is set to non-zero value, it means parameter protection password is set, and the
parameter menu cannot be entered until correct password is input. To cancel the
password protection, it needs to set FP-00 to “0”.
The parameters in the menu customized by the user are free from password protection.
Group F and A are standard function parameters, and group U are monitoring parameters.
The symbols in the function table are described as follows:
“☆”: The parameter can be modified when the inverter is in either stop or running status.
“★”: The parameter cannot be modified when the inverter is in the running status.
“●”: The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
“*”: The parameter is factory parameter and can be set only by the manufacturer.
Function
Name Setting Range Default Property
Code
Group F0: Standard Function Parameters
G/P model display 1: G model (constant torque load) Model

F0-00 ●
2: P model (load like fan and pump) dependent
1st motor control mode 0: Speed sensorless vector control

(SVC )
F0-01 0 ★
1: Speed sensor vector control (FVC)
2: V/F control
Command source 0: Operation panel (LED indicator off)

selection 1: Terminal input (LED indicator on)
F0-02 0 ☆
2: Via communication (LED indicator
blinking)
Main frequency source X 0: Digital setting (preset frequency

selection F0-08, you can make modification via
UP/DOWN, non-retentive at power
failure)
F0-03 1: Digital setting (preset frequency 0 ★
F0-08, you can make modification via
UP/DOWN, retentive at power failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
58

Function
Code
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI5)
6: Multi-speed
7: PLC
8: PID
9: Via communication
Auxiliary frequency source 0: Digital setting (preset frequency

Y selection F0-08, you can make modification via
UP/DOWN, non-retentive at power
failure)
1: Digital setting (preset frequency
F0-08, you can make modification via
UP/DOWN, retentive at power failure)
F0-04 2: AI1 0 ★
3: AI2
4: AI3
6: Multi-speed
7: PLC
8: PID
Auxiliary frequency Y 0: Relative to maximum frequency

F0-05 selection for X and Y 1: Relative to main frequency X 0 ☆
operation
Auxiliary frequency Y for X 0%-150%

F0-06 100% ☆
and Y operation
Unit’s digit: Frequency source

selection
0: Main frequency source X
1: X and Y operation (operation
relationship determined by tens digit)
2: Switching between X and Y
3: Switching between X and “X and Y
Frequency source
F0-07 operation” 00 ☆
selection
4: Switching between Y and “X and Y
operation”
Tens digit: X and Y operation
relationship
0: X+Y
1: X-Y
2: Maximum
59

Function
Code
3: Minimum
F0-08 Preset frequency 0.00-maximum frequency (F0-10) 50.00Hz ☆
0: Directions are the same.

F0-09 Rotating direction 0 ☆
1: Directions are reverse.
F0-10 Maximum frequency 50.00Hz-600.00Hz 50.00Hz ★
0: Set by F0-12
1: AI1
Source of upper limit of 2: AI2
F0-11 0 ★
output frequency 3: AI3
Upper limit of output Frequency lower limit (F0-14) to

F0-12 50.00Hz ☆
frequency maximum frequency (F0-10)
0.00Hz to maximum frequency

F0-13 Upper limit offset 0.00Hz ☆
(F0-10)
Lower limit of output 0.00Hz to upper limit of output

F0-14 0.00Hz ☆
frequency frequency (F0-12)
Model
F0-15 Carrier frequency 0.5kHz-16.0kHz ☆
dependent
Carrier frequency
0: No
F0-16 adjustment with 1 ☆
1: Yes
temperature
0.00s-650.00s(F0-19=2)
Model
F0-17 Acceleration time 1 0.0s-6500.0s(F0-19=1) ☆
dependent
0s-65000s(F0-19=0)
0.00s-650.00s(F0-19=2)
Model
F0-18 Deceleration time 1 0.0s-6500.0s(F0-19=1) ☆
dependent
0s-65000s(F0-19=0)
0:1s
Acceleration/Deceleration
F0-19 1: 0.1s 1 ★
time unit
2: 0.01s
Frequency bias of auxiliary

F0-21 frequency source for X and 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency (F0-10) 0.00Hz ☆
Y operation
Frequency command 1: 0.1Hz

F0-22 2 ★
resolution 2: 0.01Hz
Selection of digital setting

1: No retentive
F0-23 frequency retentive upon 0 ☆
2: Retentive
power failure
60

Function
Code
0: Motor parameter group 1

Motor parameter group 1: Motor parameter group 2
F0-24 0 ★
selection 2: Motor parameter group 3
0: Maximum frequency (F0-10)

F0-25 1: Set frequency 0 ★
time base frequency
2: 100Hz
Base frequency of
0: Running frequency
F0-26 UP/DOWN modification 0 ★
1: Set frequency
during running
Unit’s digit: Operation panel binding

to frequency source selection
0: No binding
1: Digital setting frequency source
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
6: Multi-command
Command source binding
F0-27 7: Simple PLC 0000 ☆
to frequency source
8: PID
Ten’s digit: Terminal command
binding to frequency source selection
(0, 9, same as unit’s digit)
Hundred’s digit: Communication
command binding to frequency
source selection
0: Modbus protocol
Serial communication
F0-28 1: Profibus-DP bridge 0 ☆
protocol selection
2: CANopen bridge
Group F1: 1st Motor Parameters
0: Common asynchronous motor

1: Variable frequency asynchronous
F1-00 Motor type selection motor 0 ★
2: Permanent magnetic synchronous
motor
F1-01 Rated power 0.1kW-1000.0kW Model ★
61

Function
Code
dependent
Model
F1-02 Rated voltage 1V-2000V ★
dependent
0.01A-655.35A (inverter
Model
F1-03 Rated current power<=55kW) ★
dependent
0.1A-6553.5A (inverter power>55kW)
Model
F1-04 Rated frequency 0.01Hz-Maximum frequency ★
dependent
Model
F1-05 Rated rotating speed 1rpm-65535rpm ★
dependent
0.001Ω-65.535Ω (inverter
Stator resistance power<=55kW) Tuning
F1-06 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter parameter
power>55kW)
Rotor resistance power<=55kW) Tuning
F1-07 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter parameter
power>55kW)
0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter Tuning

Leakage inductive
power<=55kW) parameter
F1-08 Reactance ★
0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter
(asynchronous motor)
power>55kW)

Mutual inductive
power<=55kW) parameter
F1-09 Reactance ★
power>55kW)
No-load current 0.01A-F1-03 (inverter power<=55kW) Tuning

F1-10 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.1A-F1-03 (inverter power>55kW) parameter
0.001Ω-65.535Ω (inverter Tuning

Stator resistance power<=55kW) parameter
F1-16 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter
power>55kW)

Shaft D inductance power<=55kW) parameter
F1-17 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter
power>55kW)

Shaft Q inductance
F1-18 power<=55kW) parameter ★
(synchronous motor)
62

Function
Code
power>55kW)
Counter electromotive Tuning

F1-20 0.1V-6553.5V ★
force (synchronous motor) parameter
The number of encoder

F1-27 1-65535 1024 ★
pulses
0: ABZ incremental encoder

1: UVW incremental encoder
F1-28 The type of encoder 2: Rotary encoder 0 ★
3: SIN/COS encoder
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
A, B phase sequence of 0: Forward

F1-30 0 ★
ABZ incremental encoder 1: Reserve
F1-31 Encoder installation angle 0.0°-359.9° 0.0° ★
U, V, W phase sequence 0: Forward

F1-32 0 ★
of UVW encoder 1: Reverse
F1-33 UVW encoder angle bias 0.0°-359.9° 0.0° ★
The number of pole-pairs

F1-34 1-65535 1 ★
of rotary encoder
Time on detecting encoder 0.0s: No action

F1-36 0.0 ★
wire break fault 0.1s-10.0s
0: No tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete
tuning
F1-37 Tuning selection 0 ★
11: Synchronous motor with-load
tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load
tuning
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Speed loop proportional

F2-00 0-100 30 ☆
gain 1
F2-01 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s-10.00s 0.50s ☆
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 5.00Hz ☆

F2-03 0-100 20 ☆
gain 2
F2-04 Speed loop integral time 2 0.01s-10.00s 1.00s ☆
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to maximum output frequency 10.00Hz ☆
63

Function
Code
F2-06 Vector control slip gain 50%-200% 100% ☆
Time constant of speed

F2-07 0.000s-0.100s 0.000s ☆
loop filter
Vector control
F2-08 0-200 64 ☆
over-excitation gain
0: F2-10
1: AI1
Torque upper limit source 2: AI2
F2-09 0 ☆
in speed control mode 3: AI3
Digital setting of torque

F2-10 upper limit in speed control 0.0%-200.0% 150.0% ☆
mode
Excitation adjustment
F2-13 0-60000 2000 ☆
proportion gain
F2-14 0-60000 1300 ☆
integral gain
Torque adjustment
F2-15 0-60000 2000 ☆
proportion gain
Torque adjustment integral

F2-16 0-60000 1300 ☆
gain
Unit’s digit: Integral separated

Speed loop integral
F2-17 0: Invalid 0 ☆
property
1: Valid
0: No field weakening
Synchronous motor field
F2-18 1: Direct calculation 1 ☆
weakening mode
2: Adjustment

F2-19 50%-500% 100% ☆
weakening degree
Maximum field weakening

F2-20 1%-300% 50% ☆
current
Field weakening automatic

F2-21 10%-500% 100% ☆
adjustment gain
Field weakening integral

F2-22 2-10 2 ☆
multiple
Group F3: V/F Control Parameters
64

Function
Code
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2 power law
4: 1.4 power law
F3-00 V/F curve setting 0 ★
6: 1.6 power law
8: 1.8 power law
9: Reserved
10: V/F separated mode
11: V/F half separated mode
Model
F3-01 Torque boost 0.0%-30% ☆
dependent
Cutoff frequency of torque

F3-02 0.00Hz-maximum output frequency 50.00Hz ★
boost
Multi-point V/F frequency 1

F3-03 0.00Hz-F3-05 0.00Hz ★
(F1)
Multi-point V/F voltage 1

F3-04 0.0%-100.0% 0.0% ★
(V1)
Multi-point V/F frequency 2 F3-03-F3-07

F3-05 0.00Hz ★
(F2)

F3-06 0.0%-100.0% 0.0% ★
(V2)
F3-05 to motor rated frequency

(F1-04)
Multi-point V/F frequency 3
F3-07 Note: The rated frequency of the 0.00Hz ★
(F3) nd rd th
2 /3 /4 motor is
A2-04/A3-04/A4-04.

F3-08 0.0%-100.0% 0.0% ★
(V3)
F3-09 V/F slip compensation gain 0%-200.0% 0.0% ☆
F3-10 V/F over-excitation gain 0-200 64 ☆
V/F oscillation suppression Model

F3-11 0-100 ☆
gain dependent
0: Digital setting (F3-14)

1: AI1
V/F separated voltage 2: AI2
F3-13 0 ☆
source 3: AI3
5: Multi-speed
65

Function
Code
6: Simple PLC mode

7: PID
100.0% corresponds to motor rated
voltage (F1-02, A4-02, A5-02, A6-02)
V/F separated voltage

F3-14 0V-Motor rated voltage 0V ☆
source digital setting
V/F separated voltage rise

F3-15 0.0s-1000.0s 0.0s ☆
time
Group F4: Input Terminals
F4-00 DI1 function selection 0: No function; 1: Forward RUN 1 ★
F4-01 DI2 function selection (FWD); 2: Reverse RUN (REV) 4 ★

3: Three-line control; 4: Forward JOG
F4-02 DI3 function selection 9 ★
(FJOG); 5: Reverse JOG (RJOG); 6:
Terminal UP; 7: Terminal DOWN; 8:
F4-04 DI5 function selection Coast to stop; 9: Fault reset (RESET); 13 ★
F4-05 DI6 function selection 10: RUN pause; 11: External fault NO 0 ★
F4-06 DI7 function selection input; 12: Multi-speed terminal 1; 13: 0 ★

Multi-speed terminal 2; 14:
Acceleration/Deceleration time
selection terminal 1; 17:
selection terminal 2; 18: Frequency
source switchover; 19: UP and
DOWN setting clear
(terminal, operation panel); 20: RUN
command switching terminal; 21:
Acceleration/Deceleration prohibited;
F4-09 DI10 function selection 22: PID pause; 23: PLC status reset; 0 ★
24: Swing pause; 25: Counting input;
26: Counting reset; 27: Length count
input; 28: Length reset; 29: Torque
control prohibited; 30: Pulse input
(enabled only for DI5); 31: Reserved;
32: Immediate DC braking; 33:
External fault normally closed input;
34: Frequency modification enabled;
35: Reverse PID action direction; 36:
66

Function
Code
External STOP terminal 1; 37: Control

command switchover terminal 2; 38:
PID integral pause; 39: Switchover
between main frequency source X
and preset frequency; 40: Switchover
between auxiliary frequency source Y
and preset frequency; 41: Motor
selection terminal 1; 42: Motor
selection terminal 2; 43: PID
parameters switchover; 44: User
defined fault 1; 45: User defined fault
2; 46: Speed/torque control
switchover; 47: Emergency stop; 48:
External STOP terminal 2; 49:
Deceleration DC braking; 50: Clear
the current running time; 51-59:
Reserved
F4-10 DI filter time 0.000s-1.000s 0.010s ☆
0: Two-line 1
1: Two-line 2
F4-11 Terminal command mode 0 ★
2: Three-line 1
3: Three-line 2
F4-12 Terminal UP/DOWN rate 0.001Hz/s-65.535Hz/s 1.00Hz/s ☆
F4-13 AI1 minimum input 0.00V-F4-15 0.00V ☆
AI1 minimum input

F4-14 -100.0%-+100.0% 0.0% ☆
corresponding value
F4-15 AI1 maximum input F4-13-+10.00V 10.00V ☆
AI1 maximum input

F4-16 -100.0%-+100.0% 100.0% ☆
corresponding value
F4-17 AI2 minimum input 0.00s-10.00s 0.10s ☆
AI2 minimum input

F4-18 0.00V-F4-20 0.00V ☆
corresponding value
F4-19 AI2 maximum input -100.0%-+100.0% 0.0% ☆
AI2 maximum input

F4-20 F4-18-+10.00V 10.00V ☆
corresponding value
F4-21 AI2 filter time -100.0%-+100.0% 100.0% ☆
F4-22 AI2 minimum input 0.00s-10.00s 0.10s ☆
F4-23 AI3 minimum input -10.00V-F4-25 -10.00V ☆
F4-24 AI3 minimum input -100.0%-+100.0% -100.0% ☆

67

Function
Code
corresponding value
F4-25 AI3 maximum input F4-23-+10.00V 10.00V ☆
AI3 maximum input

F4-26 -100.0%-+100.0% 100.0% ☆
corresponding value
F4-27 AI3 filter time 0.00s-10.00s 0.10s ☆
F4-28 Pulse minimum input 0.00kHz-F4-30 0.00kHz ☆
Pulse minimum input

F4-29 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
corresponding value
F4-30 Pulse maximum input F4-28-100.00kHz 50.00kHz ☆
Pulse maximum input

F4-31 -100.0%-100.0% 100.0% ☆
corresponding value
F4-32 Pulse filter time 0.00s-10.00s 0.10s ☆
Unit’s digit: AI1 curve selection

Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 to
F4-16)
F4-21)
F4-26)
F4-33 AI curve selection Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00 to 321 ☆
A6-07)
Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08 to
A6-15)
Ten’s digit: AI2 curve selection
Curve 1-curve 5 (same as AI1)
Hundred’s digit: AI3 curve selection
Unit’s digit: AI1 less than minimum

input setting selection
0: Take the minimum value
1: 0.0%
AI less than minimum input Ten’s digit: AI2 less than minimum
F4-34 000 ☆
setting selection input
(0, 1, same as AI1)
Hundred’s digit: AI3 less than
minimum input
(0, 1, same as AI1)
F4-35 DI1 delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ★
68

Function
Code
0: High level valid

1: Low level valid
Unit’s digit: DI1
F4-38 DI valid status selection 1 Ten’s digit: DI2 00000 ★
Hundred’s digit: DI3
Thousand’s digit: DI4
Ten thousand’s digit: DI5
0: High level valid

1: Low level valid
Unit’s digit: DI6
F4-39 DI valid status selection 2 Ten’s digit: DI7 00000 ★
Hundred’s digit: DI8
Thousand’s digit: DI9
Ten thousand’s digit: DI10
Group F5: Output Terminals
FM terminal output mode 0: Pulse output (FMR)

F5-00 0 ☆
selection 1: Open-collector output (FMR)
FMR function selection 0: No output; 1: Inverter running; 2:

F5-01 (open-collector output Fault output (stop); 3: 0 ☆
terminal) Frequency-level detection FDT1
Relay function selection output; 4:

F5-02 Frequency reaching; 5: Running at 2 ☆
(T/A-T/B-T/C)
zero speed (no output in the state of
Extension card relay
stop); 6: Motor overload warning; 7:
F5-03 function selection 0 ☆
Inverter overload warning; 8: Set
(P/A-P/B-P/C)
counting value reaching; 9:
DO1 function selection
Designated counting value reaching;
F5-04 (open-collector output 1 ☆
10: Length reaching; 11: PLC cycle
terminal)
complete; 12: Accumulative running
time reaching; 13: Frequency limited;
14: Torque limited; 15: Ready for
RUN; 16: AI1>AI2; 17: Frequency
upper limit reaching; 18: Frequency
Extension card DO2 lower limit reaching (no output in the
F5-05 4 ☆
function selection state of stop); 19: Under-voltage
status output; 20: Communication
setting; 21-22: Reserved; 23:
Running at zero speed 2 (having
output in the state of stop); 24:
69

Function
Code
Accumulative power-on time

reaching; 25: Frequency-level
detection FDT2 output; 26:
Frequency 1 reaching output; 27:
Frequency 2 reaching output; 28:
Current 1 reaching output; 29:
Current 2 reaching output; 30: Timing
operation complete output; 31: AI1
input exceeding limit; 32: Load
becoming 0; 33: Reverse running; 34:
Zero current state; 35: Module
temperature reaching; 36: Software
current exceeding limit; 37:
Frequency lower limit reaching
(having output in the state of stop);
38: Alarm output; 39: Motor
overheated alarm; 40: Current
running time reaching
F5-06 FMP function selection 0: Running frequency; 1: Set 0 ☆
F5-07 AO1 function selection frequency; 2: Output current; 3: 0 ☆

Output torque (absolute value); 4:
Output power; 5: Output voltage; 6:
Pulse input; 7: AI1; 8: AI2; 9: AI3; 10:
Length; 11: Counting value; 12:
F5-08 AO2 function selection Communication setting; 13: Motor
1 ☆
rotating speed; 14: Output current;

15: Output voltage; 16: Output torque
(actual value)
Maximum FMP output 0.01kHz-100.00kHz

F5-09 50.00kHz ☆
frequency)
F5-10 AO1 offset coefficient -100.0%-+100.0% 0.0% ☆
F5-11 AO1 gain -10.00-+10.00 1.00 ☆
F5-12 AO2 offset coefficient -100.0%-+100.0% 0.0% ☆
F5-13 AO2 gain -10.00-+10.00 1.00 ☆
F5-17 FMR output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F5-18 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F5-19 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F5-20 DO1 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F5-21 DO2 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ☆
70

Function
Code
0: positive logic
1: negative logic
Unit’s digit: FMR
F5-22 DO valid selection mode Ten’s digit: RELAY1 00000 ☆
Hundred’s digit: RELAY2
Thousand’s digit: DO1
Ten thousand’s digit: DO2
Group F6: Start/Stop Control
0: Direct start
1: Rotation speed tracking restart
F6-00 Startup mode 0 ☆
2: Pre-excited start (asynchronous
motor)
0: From stop frequency

Rotation speed tracking
F6-01 1: From zero speed 0 ★
mode
2: From maximum frequency
Rotation speed tracking

F6-02 1-100 20 ☆
speed
F6-03 Startup frequency 0.00Hz-10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
Startup frequency holding

F6-04 0.0s-100.0s 0.0s ★
time
Starting DC braking
F6-05 current /Pre-excited 0%-100% 0% ★
current
Starting DC braking time

F6-06 0.0s-100.0s 0.0s ★
/Pre-excited time
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration
F6-07 A 0 ★
mode
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration
B
Time proportion of S-curve

F6-08 0.0%-(100.0%-F6-09) 30.0% ★
start segment
Time proportion of S-curve

F6-09 0.0%-(100.0%-F6-08) 30.0% ★
end segment
0: Decelerate to stop
F6-10 Stop mode 0 ☆
1: Coast to stop
DC braking starting
F6-11 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz ☆
frequency at stop
71

Function
Code
DC braking waiting time at

F6-12 0.0s-100.0s 0.0s ☆
stop
F6-13 DC braking current at stop 0%-100% 0% ☆
F6-14 DC braking time at stop 0.0s-100.0s 0.0s ☆
F6-15 Brake use ratio 0%-100% 100% ☆
Group F7: Operation Panel and Display
0: MF.K key invalid

1: Switchover between operation
panel and remote command
MF.K Key function channel (terminal or communication)
F7-01 0 ★
selection 2: Switchover between forward
rotation and reverse rotation
3: Forward JOG
4: Reverse JOG
0: STOP/RESET key valid only in

operation panel mode
F7-02 STOP/RESET key function 1 ☆
1: STOP/RESET key valid only in any
operation mode
0000-FFFF
Bit00: Running frequency 1(Hz)
Bit01: Set frequency (Hz)
Bit02: Bus voltage (V)
Bit03: output voltage (V)
Bit04: Output current (A)
Bit05: Output power (kW)
Bit06: Output torque (%)
LED displaying running
F7-03 Bit07: DI input status 1F ☆
parameters 1
Bit08: DO output status
Bit09: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit12: Counting value
Bit13: Length value
Bit14: Load speed display
Bit15: PID setting
0000-FFFF
LED displaying running Bit00: PID feedback
F7-04 0 ☆
parameters 2 Bit01: PLC stage
Bit02: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
72

Function
Code
Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz)

Bit04: Remaining running time
Bit05: AI1 voltage before correction
(V)
(V)
(V)
Bit08: Linear speed
Bit09: Current power-on time (Hour)
Bit10: Current running time (Min)
Bit11: PULSE input frequency (Hz)
Bit12: Communication setting value
Bit13: Encoder feedback speed (Hz)
Bit14: Main frequency X display (Hz)
Bit15: Auxiliary frequency Y display
(Hz)
0000-FFFF
Bit00: Running frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Bus voltage (V)
Bit02: DI input status
Bit03: DO output status
LED displaying stop Bit05: AI2 voltage (V)
F7-05 33 ☆
parameters Bit06: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit07: Counting value
Bit08: Length value
Bit09: PLC stage
Bit10: Load speed
Bit11: PID setting
Bit12: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
Load speed display

F7-06 0.0001-6.5000 1.0000 ☆
coefficient
Heat sink temperature of

F7-07 0.0℃-100.0℃ - ●
inverter module
Heat sink temperature of

F7-08 0.0℃-100.0℃ - ●
rectifier module
F7-09 Accumulative running time 0h-65535h - ●
F7-10 Product number - - ●
F7-11 Soft version number - - ●
73

Function
Code
0: 0 decimal place
The number of decimal
1: 1 decimal place
F7-12 places of load speed 1 ☆
2: 2 decimal places
display
3: 3 decimal places
Accumulative power-on 0h-65535h

F7-13 - ●
time
Accumulative power 0-65535KWH

F7-14 - ●
consumption
Group F8: Auxiliary Functions
F8-00 JOG running frequency 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 2.00Hz ☆
F8-01 JOG acceleration time 0.0s-6500.0s 20.0s ☆
F8-02 JOG deceleration time 0.0s-6500.0s 20.0s ☆
Model
F8-03 Acceleration time 2 0.0s-6500.0s ☆
dependent
Model
F8-04 Deceleration time 2 0.0s-6500.0s ☆
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
F8-09 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz ☆
F8-10 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz ☆
F8-11 Frequency jump amplitude 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.01Hz ☆
Forward/Reverse rotation
F8-12 0.0s-3000.0s 0.0s ☆
dead-zone time
0: Enabled
F8-13 Reverse control 0 ☆
1: Disabled
Running mode when set 0: Run at frequency lower limit

F8-14 frequency below frequency 1: Stop 0 ☆
lower limit 2: Run at zero speed
F8-15 Droop control 0.00Hz-10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
Set accumulative
F8-16 0h-65000h 0h ☆
power-on time
74

Function
Code
Set accumulative running

F8-17 0h-65000h 0h ☆
time
Startup protection 0: No protection

F8-18 0 ☆
selection 1: protection
Frequency detection 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency

F8-19 50.00Hz ☆
value (FDT1)
Frequency detection 0.0%-100.0% (FDT1 level)

F8-20 hysteresis (FDT hysteresis 5.0% ☆
1)
Frequency reaching 0.00-100% (maximum frequency)

F8-21 0.0% ☆
detection amplitude
Jump frequency during 0: Disabled

F8-22 0 ☆
acceleration/deceleration 1: Enabled
Frequency point at 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency

switchover between
F8-25 0.00Hz ☆
acceleration time 1 and
acceleration time 2
Frequency point at 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency

switchover between
F8-26 0.00Hz ☆
deceleration time 1 and
deceleration time 2
0: Disabled
F8-27 Terminal JOG preferred 0 ☆
1: Enabled
Frequency detection 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency

F8-28 50.00Hz ☆
value (FDT2)
Frequency detection 0.0%-100.0% (FDT2 level)

F8-29 hysteresis (FDT hysteresis 5.0% ☆
2)
Any frequency reaching 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency

F8-30 50.00Hz ☆
detection value 1
Any frequency reaching 0.0%-100.0% (Maximum frequency)

F8-31 0.0% ☆
detection amplitude 1
Any frequency reaching 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency

F8-32 50.00Hz ☆
detection value 2
Any frequency reaching 0.0%-100.0% (Maximum frequency)

F8-33 0.0% ☆
detection amplitude 2
Zero current detection 0.0%-300.0% (Motor rated current)

F8-34 5.0% ☆
level
75

Function
Code
Zero current detection 0.00s-600.00s

F8-35 0.10s ☆
delay time
Output current exceeding 0.0% (no detection)

F8-36 200.0% ☆
limit value 0.1%-300.0% (Motor rated current)
Output current exceeding 0.00s-600.00s

F8-37 0.00s ☆
limit detection delay time
F8-38 Any current reaching 1 0.0%-300.0% (Motor rated current) 100.0% ☆
Any current reaching 1 0.0%-300.0% (Motor rated current)

F8-39 0.0% ☆
amplitude
F8-40 Any current reaching 2 0.0%-300.0% (Motor rated current) 100.0% ☆
Any current reaching 2 0.0%-300.0% (Motor rated current)

F8-41 0.0% ☆
amplitude
0: Disabled
F8-42 Timing function selection 0 ☆
1: Enabled
0: F8-44
Timing operation time 1: AI1
F8-43 0 ☆
selection 2: AI2
3: AI3
F8-44 Timing operation time 0.0Min-6500.0Min 0.0Min ☆
AI1 input voltage 0.00V-F8-46

F8-45 3.10V ☆
protection value lower limit
AI1 input voltage F8-45-10.00V

F8-46 6.80V ☆
protection value upper limit
Module temperature 0.00V-F8-46

F8-47 75℃ ☆
reaching
0: Fan works during running

F8-48 Cooling fan control 0 ☆
1: Fan works all along
Sleep frequency (F8-51)-Maximum

F8-49 Wakeup frequency 0.00Hz ☆
frequency (F0-10)
F8-50 Wakeup delay time 0.0s-6500.0s 0.0s ☆
F8-51 Sleep frequency 0.00Hz-Wakeup frequency (F8-49) 0.00Hz ☆
F8-52 Sleep delay time 0.0s-6500.0s 0.0s ☆
Current running time 0.0Min-6500.0Min

F8-53 0.0Min ☆
reaching
Group F9: Fault and Protection
Motor overload protection 0: Disabled

F9-00 1 ☆
selection 1: Enabled
76

Function
Code
Motor overload protection 0.20-10.00

F9-01 1.00 ☆
gain
Motor overload pre-alarm 50%-100%

F9-02 80% ☆
coefficient
F9-03 Over-voltage stall gain 0 (no stall overvoltage)-100 0 ☆
Over-voltage stall
F9-04 120%-150% 130% ☆
protective voltage
F9-05 Over-current stall gain 0-100 20 ☆
Over-current stall
F9-06 100%-200% 150% ☆
protective current
Selection of short-circuit to
0: Disabled
F9-07 earth protection upon 1 ☆
1: Enabled
power-on
F9-09 Fault auto reset times 0-20 0 ☆
Fault DO action selection 0: No action

F9-10 0 ☆
during fault auto reset 1: Action
Fault auto reset time

F9-11 0.1s-100.0s 1.0s ☆
interval
Unit’s digit: Input phase missing

Input phase missing protection
protection and contactor Ten’s digit: Contactor pick-up
F9-12 11 ☆
pick-up protection protection
selection 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Output phase missing 0: Disabled

F9-13 1 ☆
protection selection 1: Enabled
0: No fault
1: Reserved
2: Acceleration over-current
3: Deceleration over-current
4: Constant over-current
5: Acceleration over-voltage
F9-14 1st fault type 6: Deceleration over-voltage - ●
7: Constant over-voltage
8: Buffer resistance overloaded
9: Under-voltage
10: Inverter overloaded
11: Motor overloaded
12: Input phase missing
77

Function
Code
13: Output phase missing

14: Module overheated
15: External fault
16: Communication abnormality
17: Contactor abnormality
18: Current detection abnormality
19: Motor tuning abnormality
F9-15 2nd fault type - ●
20: Encoder/PG card abnormality
21: Parameter read-out and write-in
abnormality
22: inverter hardware abnormality
23: Motor short circuited to ground
24: Reserved
25: Reserved
26: Running time reaching

27: User defined fault 1
28: User defined fault 2
29: Power-on time reaching
30: Load becoming 0
31: PID feedback loss during running
F9-16 3rd (latest) fault type - ●
40: Rapid current limit time-out
41: Motor switchover during running
42: Too big speed deviation
43: Motor over-speed
45: Motor overheated
51: Initial position error
rd
F9-17 Frequency upon 3 fault - - ●
F9-18 Current upon 3rd fault - - ●
F9-19 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault - - ●

rd
F9-20 DI status upon 3 fault - - ●
Output terminal status

F9-21 - - ●
upon 3rd fault
Inverter status upon 3rd

F9-22 - - ●
fault
Power-on time upon 3rd

F9-23 - - ●
fault
F9-24 Running time upon 3rd fault - - ●
F9-27 Frequency upon 2nd fault - - ●

nd
F9-28 Current upon 2 fault - - ●
78

Function
Code
F9-29 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault - - ●
F9-30 DI status upon 2nd fault - - ●

F9-31 - - ●
upon 2nd fault
F9-32 Frequency upon 2nd fault - - ●
F9-33 Current upon 2nd fault - - ●
F9-34 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault - - ●

st
F9-37 DI status upon 1 fault - - ●

F9-38 - - ●
upon 1st fault
F9-39 Frequency upon 1st fault - - ●
F9-40 Current upon 1st fault - - ●

rd
F9-41 Bus voltage upon 3 fault - - ●
F9-42 DI status upon 1st fault - - ●

F9-43 - - ●
upon 1st fault
F9-44 Frequency upon 1st fault - - ●
Unit’s digit: motor overload (Err11)

0: Coast to stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: Continue to run
Ten’s digit: input phase missing
Fault protection action (Err12), same as unit’s digit
F9-47 00000 ☆
selection 1 Hundred’s digit: output phase missing
(Err13), same as unit’s digit
Thousand’s digit: external fault
(Err15), same as unit’s digit
Ten thousand’s digit: communication
abnormal (Err16), same as unit’s digit
Unit’s digit: encoder error (Err20)

0: Coast to stop
1: Switch over to V/F control, stop
according to the stop mode
Fault protection action 2: Switch over to V/F control, continue
F9-48 00000 ☆
selection 2 to run
Ten’s digit: parameter read-out and
write-in abnormal (Err21)
0: Coast to stop
79

Function
Code
Hundred’s digit: reserved

Thousand’s digit: motor overheated
(Err25), same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Ten thousand’s digit: Running time
reaching, same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Unit’s digit: user defined error 1

(Err27), Same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Ten’s digit: user defined error 2
(Err28), Same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Hundred’s digit: power-on time
reaching (Err29),
same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Thousand’s digit: Load becoming 0
Fault protection action
F9-49 (Err30) 00000 ☆
selection 3
0: Coast to stop
2: Continue to run at 7% of motor
rated frequency and resume to the
set frequency if the load recovers.
Ten thousand’s digit: PID feedback
lost during running (Err31), same a
unit’s digit in F9-47
Unit’s digit: too big speed deviation

Fault protection action Ten’s digit: motor over-speed (Err43),
F9-50 00000 ☆
selection 4 same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Hundred’s digit: initial position error
0: Current running frequency

1: Set frequency
Frequency selection for 2: Frequency upper limit
F9-54 0 ☆
continuing to run upon fault 3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency upon
abnormality
Backup frequency upon

F9-55 0.0%-100.0% (maximum frequency) 100.0% ☆
abnormality
0: No temperature sensor
Motor temperature sensor
F9-56 1: PT100 0 ☆
type
2: PT1000
Motor overheated
F9-57 0℃-200℃ 110℃ ☆
protection threshold
80

Function
Code
Motor overheated
F9-58 0℃-200℃ 90℃ ☆
pre-alarm threshold
0: Invalid
Instantaneous power
F9-59 1: Decelerate 0 ☆
failure action selection
Instantaneous power
F9-60 failure action pausing 80.0%-100.0% 90.0% ☆
judging voltage
Instantaneous power
F9-61 failure voltage rally judging 0.00s-100.00s 0.50s ☆
time
Instantaneous power
60.0%-100.0% ( standard bus
F9-62 failure action judging 80.0% ☆
voltage)
voltage
Load becoming 0 0: Disabled

F9-63 0 ☆
Load becoming 0 detection

F9-64 0.0%-100.0% (motor rated current) 10.0% ☆
level
Load becoming 0 detection

F9-65 0.0s-60.0s 1.0s ☆
time
Over-speed detection
value
F9-68 Over-speed detection time 0.0s-60.0s 1.0s ☆
Too big speed deviation

detection value

F9-70 0.0s-60.0s 5.0s ☆
detection time
Group FA: Process Control PID Function
0: FA-01
1: AI1
2: AI2
FA-00 PID setting source 3: AI3 0 ☆
6: Multi-command
FA-01 PID digital setting 0.0%-100.0% 50.0% ☆
0: AI1
FA-02 PID feedback source 0 ☆
1: AI2
81

Function
Code
2: AI3
3: AI1-AI2
6: AI1+AI2
7: MAX(|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)
0: Forward action
FA-03 PID action direction 0 ☆
1: Reverse action
PID setting feedback

FA-04 0-65535 1000 ☆
range
FA-05 Proportional gain Kp1 0.0-100.0 20.0 ☆
FA-06 Integral time Ti1 0.01s-10.00s 2.00s ☆
FA-07 Differential time Td1 0.000s-10.000s 0.000s ☆
Cutoff frequency of PID

FA-08 0.0-Maximum frequency 2.00Hz ☆
reverse rotation
FA-09 PID deviation limit 0.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FA-10 PID differential limit 0.00%-100.00% 0.10% ☆
FA-11 PID setting change time 0.00-650.00s 0.00s ☆
FA-12 PID feedback filter time 0.00-60.00s 0.00s ☆
FA-13 PID output filter time 0.00-60.00s 0.00s ☆
FA-14 Reserved - - ☆
FA-15 Proportional gain Kp2 0.0-100.0 20.0 ☆
FA-16 Integral time Ti2 0.01s-10.00s 2.00s ☆
FA-17 Differential time Td2 0.000s-10.000s 0.000s ☆
0: No switchover
PID parameters switchover 1: Switchover via terminal
FA-18 0 ☆
condition 2: Automatic switchover based on
deviation
PID parameters switchover

FA-19 0.0%-FA-20 20.0% ☆
deviation 1

FA-20 FA-19-100.0% 80.0% ☆
deviation 2
FA-21 PID initial value 0.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
PID initial value holding

FA-22 0.00-650.00s 0.00s ☆
time
FA-23 Maximum deviation of two 0.00%-100.00% 1.00% ☆
82

Function
Code
PID outputs in forward

direction
Maximum deviation of two

FA-24 PID outputs in reverse 0.00%-100.00% 1.00% ☆
direction
Unit’s digit: Integral separated

0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten’s digit: : Whether to stop integral
FA-25 PID integral property 00 ☆
operation when the output reaches
the limit
0: Continue integral operation
1: Stop integral operation
PID feedback loss 0.0%: Not judging feedback loss

FA-26 0.0% ☆
detection value 0.1%-100.0%
PID feedback loss

FA-27 0.0s-20.0s 0.0s ☆
detection time
Selection of PID operation 0: No PID operation at stop

FA-28 0 ☆
at stop 1: PID operation at stop
Group FB: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
Swing frequency setting 0: Relative to the central frequency

Fb-00 0 ☆
mode 1: Relative to maximum frequency
Fb-01 Swing frequency amplitude 0.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
Fb-02 Kick frequency amplitude 0.0%-50.0% 0.0% ☆
Fb-03 Swing frequency cycle 0.1s-3000.0s 10.0s ☆
Triangular wave rising time

Fb-04 0.1%-100.0% 50.0% ☆
coefficient
Fb-05 Set length 0m-65535m 1000m ☆
Fb-06 Actual length 0m-65535m 0m ☆
The number of pulses

Fb-07 0.1-6553.5 100.0 ☆
each meter
Fb-08 Set counting value 1-65535 1000 ☆
Fb-09 Designated counting value 1-65535 1000 ☆
Group FC: Multi-command and Simple PLC Function
FC-00 Command 0 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-01 Command 1 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
83

Function
Code
FC-02 Command 2 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-03 Command 3 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-04 Command 4 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-05 Command 5 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-06 Command 6 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-07 Command 7 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-08 Command 8 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-09 Command 9 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-10 Command 10 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-11 Command 11 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-12 Command 12 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-13 Command 13 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-14 Command 14 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
FC-15 Command 15 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
0: Stop after the inverter runs one

cycle
1: Keep final values after the inverter
FC-16 Simple PLC running mode 0 ☆
runs one cycle
2: Start another cycle after the
inverter runs one cycle
Unit’s digit: Retentive selection upon

power failure
0: No retentive
Simple PLC retentive 1: Retentive
FC-17 00 ☆
selection Ten’s digit: Retentive selection upon
power stop
0: No retentive
1: Retentive
Running time of command

FC-18 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
0 of simple PLC
Acceleration/deceleration
FC-19 time of command 0 of 0-3 0 ☆
simple PLC

FC-20 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
1 of simple PLC
simple PLC
84

Function
Code

FC-22 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
2 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-24 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
3 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-26 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
4 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-28 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
5 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-30 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
6 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-32 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
7 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-34 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
8 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-36 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
9 of simple PLC
FC-37 0-3 0 ☆
time of command 9 of
85

Function
Code
simple PLC

FC-38 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
10 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-40 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
11 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-42 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
12 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-44 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
13 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-46 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
14 of simple PLC
simple PLC

FC-48 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
15 of simple PLC
simple PLC
Simple PLC running time 0:s (second)

FC-50 0 ☆
unit 1:h (hour)
0: Set by FC-00
1: AI1
2: AI2
FC-51 Command 0 source 0 ☆
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting
5: PID
86

Function
Code
6: set by preset frequency (F0-08)

modified via UP/DOWN
Group FD: Communication Parameters
Unit’s: MODBUS
0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
9:115200BPS
Ten’s digit: Profibus-DP
Fd-00 Communication baud rate 0:115200BPs 6005 ☆
1:208300BPs
2:256000BPs
3:512000Bps
Hundred’s digit: Reserved
Thousand’s digit: CANlink baud rate
0: 20
1: 50
2: 100
3: 125
4: 250
5: 500
6: 1M
0: No check (8-N-2)
1: Even check (8-E-1)
Fd-01 MODBUS data format 2: Odd check (8-O-1) 0 ☆
3: No check (8-N-1)
(MODBUS valid)
0: Broadcast address
1-249
Fd-02 Local address 1 ☆
(MODBUS, Profibus-DP, CANlink
valid)
0-20ms
Fd-03 MODBUS reply delay 2 ☆
(MODBUS valid)
Fd-04 Serial communication 0.0: Invalid 0.0 ☆

87

Function
Code
time-out time 0.1-60.0s

(MODBUS, Profibus-DP, CANopen
valid)
Unit’s digit: MODBUS

0: Non-standard MODBUS protocol
11: Standard MODBUS protocol
MODBUS; Profibus-DP
Ten’s digit: Profibus-DP
Fd-05 communication data 30 ☆
0: PPO1 format
format
1: PPO2 format
2: PPO3 format
3: PPO5 format
Communication reading 0: 0.01A

Fd-06 0 ☆
current resolution 1: 0.1A
Group FE: User Defined Function Codes
FE-00 User function code 0 F0-00-FP-xx F0.10 ☆
FE-01 User function code 1 A0-00-Ax-xx F0.02 ☆

U0-xx-U0-xx
FE-02 User function code 2 F0.03 ☆
88

Function
Code
Group FP: User Password
FP-00 User password 0-65535 0 ☆
0: No operation
1: Restore factory settings except
motor parameters
FP-01 Parameter initialization 0 ★
2: Clear records
4: Restore user backup parameters
501: Back up current user parameters
Unit’s digit: Group U display selection

0: Not display
1: Display
FP-02 Parameter display property 11 ★
Ten’s digit: Group A display selection
0: Not display
1: Display
Unit’s digit: User defined parameter

0: Not display
Individualized parameter 1: Display
FP-03 00 ☆
display property Ten’s digit: User modified parameter
0: Not display
1: Display
Parameter modification 0: Modifiable

FP-04 0 ☆
property 1: Not modifiable
Group A0: Torque Control and Restricting Parameters
Speed/Torque control 0: Speed control

A0-00 0 ★
selection 1: Torque control
Selection of torque setting 0: Digital setting (A0-03)

A0-01 0 ★
source in torque control 1: AI1
89

Function
Code
mode 2: AI2
3: AI3
6: MIN(AI1, AI2)
7: MAX(AI1, AI2)
Torque digital setting in -200.0% to 200.0%

A0-03 150.0% ☆
torque control mode
Forward maximum
A0-05 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency (F0-10) 50.00Hz ☆
frequency in torque control
Reverse maximum 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency (F0-10)

A0-06 50.00Hz ☆
frequency in torque control
Acceleration time in torque

A0-07 0.00s-65000s 0.00s ☆
control
Deceleration time in torque

A0-08 0.00s-65000s 0.00s ☆
control
Group A1: Virtual DI/DO Parameters
Virtual VDI1 function

A1-00 0-59 0 ★
selection

A1-01 0-59 0 ★
selection

A1-02 0-59 0 ★
selection

A1-03 0-59 0 ★
selection

A1-04 0-59 0 ★
selection
0: Decided by status of virtual DOx

1: Decided by A1-06Unit’s digit:
Virtual VDI1
Virtual VDI valid status
A1-05 Ten’s digit: Virtual VDI2 00000 ★
setting mode
Hundred’s digit: Virtual VDI3
Thousand’s digit: Virtual VDI4
Ten thousand’s digit: Virtual VDI5
0: Disabled
Virtual VDI valid status 1: Enabled
A1-06 00000 ★
setting mode Unit’s digit: Virtual VDI1
Ten’s digit: Virtual VDI2
90

Function
Code
Hundred’s digit: Virtual VDI3

Thousand’s digit: Virtual VDI4
Ten thousand’s digit: Virtual VDI5
AI1 used as DI function

A1-07 0-59 0 ★
selection

A1-08 0-59 0 ★
selection

A1-09 0-59 0 ★
selection
0: High level valid

1: Low level valid
AI used as DI valid status
A1-10 Unit’s digit: AI1 000 ★
selection
Ten’s digit: AI2
Hundred’s digit: AI3
0: Jump out with physical Dix

Virtual VDO1 function internally
A1-11 0 ☆
selection 1-40: Refer to physical DO function
selection in group F5.

A1-12 0 ☆

A1-13 0 ☆

A1-14 0 ☆

A1-15 0 ☆
A1-16 VDO1 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s ☆
91

Function
Code
0: Positive logic
1: Reverse logic
Unit’s digit: VDO1
A1-21 VDO valid status selection Ten’s digit: VDO2 00000 ☆
Hundred’s digit: VDO3
Thousand’s digit: VDO4
Ten thousand’s digit: VDO5
Group A2-A4: 2nd Motor Parameters

A2-00 Motor type selection motor 0 ★
motor
Model
A2-01 Rated power 0.1kW-1000.0kW ★
dependent
Model
A2-02 Rated voltage 1V-2000V ★
dependent
Model
A2-03 Rated current power<=55kW) ★
dependent
Model
A2-04 Rated frequency 0.01Hz-Maximum frequency ★
dependent
Model
A2-05 Rated rotating speed 1rpm-65535rpm ★
dependent
Stator resistance power<=55kW) Model
A2-06 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter dependent
power>55kW)
Rotor resistance power<=55kW) Model
A2-07 ★
power>55kW)
Leakage inductive
power<=55kW) Model
A2-08 Reactance ★
0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter dependent
power>55kW)
Mutual inductive 0.1mH-6553.5mH (inverter Model

A2-09 ★
Reactance power<=55kW) dependent
92

Function
Code
(asynchronous motor) 0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter

power>55kW)
No-load current 0.01A-A2-03 (inverter power<=55kW) Model

A2-10 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.1A-A2-03 (inverter power>55kW) dependent
A2-16 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter dependent
power>55kW)
Shaft D inductance power<=55kW) Model
A2-17 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter dependent
power>55kW)
Shaft Q inductance power<=55kW) Model
A2-18 ★
power>55kW)
Counter electromotive Model

A2-20 0.1V-6553.5V ★
force (synchronous motor) dependent

A2-27 1-65535 1024 ★
pulses

A2-28 The type of encoder 2: Rotary encoder 0 ★
3: SIN/COS encoder
0: Local PG
Speed feedback PG card
A2-29 1: Extension PG 0 ★
selection
2: Pulse input (DI5)

A2-30 0 ★
A2-31 Encoder installation angle 0.0°-359.9° 0.0° ★

A2-32 0 ★
A2-33 UVW encoder angle bias 0.0°-359.9° 0.0° ★

A2-34 1-65535 1 ★
of rotary encoder

A2-36 0.0 ★
A2-37 Tuning selection 0: No tuning 0 ★

93

Function
Code

tuning
tuning
tuning

A2-38 0-100 30 ☆
gain 1
A2-39 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s-10.00s 0.50s ☆
A2-40 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to A2-43 5.00Hz ☆

A2-41 0-100 20 ☆
gain 2
A2-43 Switchover frequency 2 A2-40 to maximum output frequency 10.00Hz ☆
A2-44 Vector control slip gain 50%-200% 100% ☆

A2-45 0.000s-0.100s 0.000s ☆
loop filter
Vector control
A2-46 0-200 64 ☆
0: A2-48
1: AI1
2: AI2
A2-47 0 ☆
in speed control mode 4: Pulse setting (DI5)
6: MIN(AI1,AI2)
7: MIN(AI1,AI2)

A2-48 upper limit in speed control 0.0%-200.0% 150.0% ☆
mode
A2-51 0-20000 2000 ☆
proportion gain
A2-52 0-20000 1300 ☆
integral gain
Torque adjustment
A2-53 0-20000 2000 ☆
proportion gain

A2-54 0-20000 1300 ☆
gain
94

Function
Code
Unit’s digit: integral separated

Speed loop integral
A2-55 0: Disabled 0 ☆
property
1: Enabled
A2-56 1: Direct calculation 1 ☆
weakening mode
2: Adjustment

A2-57 50%-500% 100% ☆
weakening degree

A2-58 1%-300% 50% ☆
current

A2-59 10%-500% 100% ☆
adjustment gain

A2-60 2-10 2 ☆
multiple
2nd motor control mode 0: Speed sensorless vector control

(SVC )
A2-61 0 ★
2: V/F control
0: Same as 1st motor

nd
2 motor 1: Acceleration/Deceleration time 1
A2-62 acceleration/deceleration 2: Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 0 ☆
time 3: Acceleration/Deceleration time 3
4: Acceleration/Deceleration time 4
0.0%: Automatic torque boost Model

A2-63 2nd motor torque boost ☆
0.1%-30.0% dependent
2nd motor oscillation Model

A2-65 0-100 ☆
suppression gain dependent
Group A4: 3rd Motor Parameters

motor
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
0.01A-655.35A (inverter Model

A3-03 Rated current ★
power<=55kW) dependent
95

Function
Code
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
A3-06 ★
power>55kW)
A3-07 ★
power>55kW)
Leakage inductive
power<=55kW) Model
A3-08 Reactance ★
power>55kW)
Mutual inductive
power<=55kW) Model
A3-09 Reactance ★
power>55kW)

A3-10 ★
A3-16 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter dependent
power>55kW)
A3-17 ★
power>55kW)
A3-18 ★
power>55kW)

A3-20 0.1V-6553.5V ★

A3-27 1-65535 1024 ★
pulses
96

Function
Code

3: SIN/COS encoder
0: Local PG
selection

A3-30 0 ★

A3-32 0 ★

A3-34 1-65535 1 ★
of rotary encoder

A3-36 0.0 ★
0: No tuning
tuning
A3-37 Tuning selection 0 ★
tuning
tuning

A3-38 0-100 30 ☆
gain 1

A3-41 0-100 20 ☆
gain 2

A3-45 0.000s-0.100s 0.000s ☆
loop filter
A3-46 Vector control 0-200 64 ☆
97

Function
Code
0: A2-48
1: AI1
2: AI2
A3-47 0 ☆
6: MIN(AI1,AI2)
7: MIN(AI1,AI2)

mode
A3-51 0-20000 2000 ☆
proportion gain
A3-52 0-20000 1300 ☆
integral gain
Torque adjustment
A3-53 0-20000 2000 ☆
proportion gain

A3-54 0-20000 1300 ☆
gain

Speed loop integral
property
1: Enabled
weakening mode
2: Adjustment

A3-57 50%-500% 100% ☆
weakening degree

A3-58 1%-300% 50% ☆
current

A3-59 10%-500% 100% ☆
adjustment gain

A3-60 2-10 2 ☆
multiple
3rd motor control mode 0: Speed sensorless vector control

(SVC )
A3-61 0 ★
2: V/F control
A3-62 3rd motor 0: Same as 1st motor 0 ☆
98

Function
Code
acceleration/deceleration 1: Acceleration/Deceleration time 1


A3-63 3rd motor torque boost ☆
3rd motor oscillation Model

A3-65 0-100 ☆
Group A4: 4th Motor Parameters

motor
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
A4-03 Rated current power<=55kW) ★
dependent
Model
dependent
Model
dependent
A4-06 ★
power>55kW)
0.001Ω-65.535Ω(inverter
A4-07 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω(inverter dependent
power>55kW)
0.01mH-655.35mH(inverter
Leakage inductive
power<=55kW) Model
A4-08 Reactance ★
0.001mH-65.535mH(inverter dependent
power>55kW)
A4-09 Mutual inductive 0.1mH-6553.5mH(inverter Model ★
99

Function
Code
Reactance power<=55kW) dependent

(asynchronous motor) 0.01mH-655.35mH(inverter
power>55kW)
No-load current 0.01A-F1-03(inverter power<=55kW) Model

A4-10 ★
(asynchronous motor) 0.1A-F1-03(inverter power>55kW) dependent
0.001Ω-65.535Ω(inverter
A4-16 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω(inverter dependent
power>55kW)
A4-17 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.001mH-65.535mH(inverter dependent
power>55kW)
A4-18 ★
(synchronous motor) 0.001mH-65.535mH(inverter dependent
power>55kW)

A4-20 0.1V-6553.5V ★

A4-27 1-65535 1024 ★
pulses

3: SIN/COS encoder
0: Local PG
selection

A4-30 0 ★

A4-32 0 ★

A4-34 1-65535 1 ★
of rotary encoder

A4-36 0.0 ★
100

Function
Code
0: No tuning
tuning
A4-37 Tuning selection 0 ★
tuning
tuning

A4-38 0-100 30 ☆
gain 1

A4-41 0-100 20 ☆
gain 2

A4-45 0.000s-0.100s 0.000s ☆
loop filter
Vector control
A4-46 0-200 64 ☆
0: A2-48
1: AI1
2: AI2
A4-47 0 ☆
6: MIN(AI1,AI2)
7: MIN(AI1,AI2)

mode
A4-51 0-20000 2000 ☆
proportion gain
A4-52 0-20000 1300 ☆
integral gain
Torque adjustment
A4-53 0-20000 2000 ☆
proportion gain
A4-54 Torque adjustment integral 0-20000 1300 ☆

101

Function
Code
gain

Speed loop integral
property
1: Enabled
weakening mode
2: Adjustment

A4-57 50%-500% 100% ☆
weakening degree

A4-58 1%-300% 50% ☆
current

A4-59 10%-500% 100% ☆
adjustment gain

A4-60 2-10 2 ☆
multiple
4th motor control mode 0: Speed sensorless vector control

(SVC )
A4-61 0 ★
2: V/F control

4th motor 1: Acceleration/Deceleration time 1
A4-62 acceleration/deceleration 2: Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 0 ☆

A4-63 4th motor torque boost ☆
4th motor oscillation Model

A4-65 0-100 ☆
Group A5: Control Optimization Parameters
DPWM switchover
A5-00 0.00Hz-15Hz 12.00Hz ☆
frequency upper limit
0: Asynchronous modulation
A5-01 PWM modulation mode 0 ☆
1: Synchronous modulation
0: No compensation
Dead zone compensation
A5-02 1: Compensation mode 1 1 ☆
mode selection
2: Compensation mode 2
0: Random PWM invalid

A5-03 Random PWM depth 0 ☆
1-10: PWM carrier frequency random
102

Function
Code
depth
Rapid current limit 0: Disabled

A5-04 1 ☆
Current detection
A5-05 0-100 5 ☆
compensation
A5-06 Under-voltage point setting 60.0%-140.0% 100.0% ☆
0: No optimization
SVC optimization mode
A5-07 1: Optimization mode 1 1 ☆
selection
2: Optimization mode 2
Dead-zone time
A5-08 100%-200% 150% ☆
adjustment
Model
A5-09 Over-voltage point setting 200.0V-2500.0V ★
dependent
Group A6: AI Curve Setting
A6-00 AI curve 4 minimum input -10.00V-A6-02 0.00V ☆
AI curve 4 minimum input

A6-01 -100.0%-+100.0% 0.0% ☆
corresponding value
A6-02 AI curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6-00-A6-04 3.00V ☆
AI curve 4 inflexion 1 input

A6-03 -100.0%-+100.0% 30.0% ☆
corresponding value

A6-05 -100.0%-+100.0% 60.0% ☆
corresponding value
A6-06 AI curve 4 maximum input A6-06-+10.00V 10.00V ☆
AI curve 4 maximum input

A6-07 -100.0%-+100.0% 100.0% ☆
corresponding value
A6-08 AI curve 5 minimum input -10.00V-A6-10 -10.00V ☆

A6-09 -100.0%-+100.0% -100.0% ☆
corresponding value
A6-10 AI curve 5 inflexion 1 input A6-08-A6-12 -3.00V ☆

A6-11 -100.0%-+100.0% -30.0% ☆
corresponding value

A6-13 -100.0%-+100.0% 30.0% ☆
corresponding value
A6-14 AI curve 5 maximum input A6-12-+10.00V 10.00V ☆
103

Function
Code

A6-15 -100.0%-+100.0% 100.0% ☆
corresponding value
AI1 input corresponding

A6-16 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
value jump point

A6-17 0.0%-100.0% 0.5% ☆
value jump amplitude

A6-18 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
value jump point

A6-19 0.0%-100.0% 0.5% ☆

A6-20 -100.0%-100.0% 0.0% ☆
value jump point

A6-21 0.0%-100.0% 0.5% ☆
Group A8: Point-point Communication
Point-point communication 0: Disabled

A8-00 0
0: Master
A8-01 Master and slave selection 0
1: Slave
0: Output torque
Master sending data 1: Running frequency
A8-02 0
source selection 2: Set frequency
3: Feedback speed
Slave receiving data role 0: Torque setting

A8-03 0
selection 1: Frequency setting
A8-04 Receiving data zero bias -100.00%-100.00%
A8-05 Receiving data gain -10.00-100.00
Point-point communication
A8-06 0.0-10.0s
interruption detection time
A8-07 0.001-10.000s
master sending data cycle
Group AC: AI/AO correction
Factory-co
AC-00 AI1 measured voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
AC-01 AI1 displayed voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V ☆
rrected
AC-02 AI1 measured voltage 2 6.000V-9.999V Factory-co ☆
104

Function
Code
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
AC-08 AI3 measured voltage 1 -9.999V-10.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
AC-09 AI3 displayed voltage 1 -9.999V-10.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
AC-10 AI3 measured voltage 2 -9.999V-10.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
AC-11 AI3 displayed voltage 2 -9.999V-10.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
AC-12 AO1 target voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
AC-13 AO1 measured voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V ☆
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
Factory-co
rrected
105

Table of Monitoring Parameters
Function
Name Min. Unit Communication Address
Code
Group F0: Monitoring Parameters
U0-00 Running Frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz 7000H
U0-01 Set frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz 7001H
U0-02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1V 7002H
U0-03 Output voltage (V) 1V 7003H
U0-04 Output current (A) 0.01A 7004H
U0-05 Output power (kW) 0.1kW 7005H
U0-06 Output torque (%) 0.1% 7006H
U0-07 DI input status 1 7007H
U0-08 DO output status 1 7008H
U0-09 AI1 voltage (V) 0.01V 7009H
U0-10 AI2 voltage (V) 0.01V 700AH
U0-11 AI3 voltage (V) 0.01V 700BH
U0-12 Counting value 1 700CH
U0-13 Length value 1 700DH
U0-14 Load speed display 1 700EH
U0-15 PID setting 1 700FH
U0-16 PID feedback 1 7010H
U0-17 PLC stage 1 7011H
U0-18 Pulse input frequency (Hz) 0.01kHz 7012H
U0-19 Feedback speed(Hz) 0.01Hz 7013H
U0-20 Remaining running time 0.1Min 7014H
AI1 Voltage before

U0-21 0.001V 7015H
correction
AI2 Voltage before 0.001V 7016H

U0-22
correction
AI3 Voltage before 0.001V 7017H

U0-23
correction
U0-24 Linear velocity 1m/Min 7018H
U0-25 Current power-on time 1Min 7019H
U0-26 Current running time 0.1Min 701AH
U0-27 Pulse input frequency 1Hz 701BH
Communication setting
U0-28 0.01% 701CH
value
U0-29 Encoder feedback speed 0.01Hz 701DH
106

U0-30 Main frequency X display 0.01Hz 701EH
U0-31 Auxiliary frequency Y display 0.01Hz 701FH
Query any buffer address

U0-32 1 7020H
value
Synchronous motor rotor

U0-33 0.1° 7021H
position
U0-34 Motor temperature value 1℃ 7022H
U0-35 Target torque (%) 0.1% 7023H
Current rotary encoder

U0-36 1 7024H
position
U0-37 Power factor angle 0.1° 7025H
U0-38 ABZ position 1 7026H
U0-39 V/F separated target voltage 1V 7027H
V/F separated output

U0-40 1V 7028H
voltage
U0-41 DI input status display 1 7029H
U0-42 DO output status display 1 702AH
DI function status display 1

U0-43 1 702BH
(functions 01-40)
DI function status display 2

U0-44 1 702CH
(functions 41-80)
U0-45 Error information 1 702DH
U0-58 Phase Z counting 1 703AH
U0-59 Set frequency (%) 0.01% 703BH
U0-60 Running frequency (%) 0.01% 703CH
U0-61 Inverter running status 1 703DH
U0-63 0.01% 703FH
sending value
U0-64 0.01% 7040H
receiving value
107

Chapter 6 Description of Function Codes
Group F0: Standard Function Parameters
F0-00 G/P model 1: G model (constant torque load)

Model dependent
display 2: P model (load like fan and pump)
This parameter is only provided to the user to query the delivered model and cannot be
modified.
 1: Applicable to constant torque load that designates rated parameters
 2: Applicable to variable torque load (fan and pump) that designates rated
parameters

1st motor 0: Speed sensorless vector control (SVC ) 0
F0-01 control mode 1: Speed sensor vector control (FVC)
2: V/F control
 0: Speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
It indicates open-loop vector control, applicable to high-performance control

applications where one inverter can drive only one motor, such as machine tool,
centrifuge, wire drawing machine and plastic injection moulding machine.
 1: Speed sensor vector control (FVC)
It indicates closed-loop vector control, applicable to high-accuracy velocity or torque

control applications where one inverter can drive only one motor, such as
high-velocity paper making machine, crane and lift. An encoder must be installed at
the motor side, and a PG card supporting the encoder must be installed at the
inverter side.
 2: V/F control
It is applicable to applications with low load requirements or applications where one

motor drive multiple motors, such as fan and pump.
 If you select vector control, perform motor parameter identification so as to get
Note
correct parameter values. Better performance can be achieved by adjusting speed
regulator parameters in group F2.
 MD380 does not support SVC of permanent magnetic synchronous motor. In general
permanent magnetic synchronous motor applications, select FVC. In some
low-power motor applications, you can also select V/F.
108

Function
Name Setting Range Default
Code
Command 0: Operation panel (LED indicator off) 0
F0-02 source selection 1: Terminal control (LED indicator on)
2: Via communication (LED indicator blinking)
This parameter is used to determine the input channel of the inverter control commands,
such as run, stop, forward rotation, reverse rotation and jog operation. You can input the
commands in the following three ways:
 0: Operation panel (“LOCAL/REMOT” indicator off)
The commands are given via keys RUN, STOP/RES on the panel.
 1: Terminal input (“LOCAL/REMOT” indicator on)
The commands are given via multifunctional input terminals such as FWD and REV,
JOGF and JOGR.
 2: Via communication (LED indicator blinking)
The commands are given from host computer. If F0-02 is set to 2, select proper
communication card (Modbus RTU, Profibus-DP card, CANlink card, user
programmable card or CANopen card).
− If Profibus-DP card is selected and PZD1 data is valid, the command is given by
the PZD1 data.
− If user programmable card is selected, the command is written in via the
programmable card.
− If any other card is selected, the command is written in via the communication
address 0x2000. For details on definition of commands, see Appendix I: MD380
Communication Address Definition.
Function
Code
Main frequency 0: Digital setting (preset frequency F0-08, you can
0
source X make modification via UP/DOWN, non-retentive at
selection power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset frequency F0-08, you can
make modification via UP/DOWN, retentive at power
failure)
2: AI1
F0-03
3: AI2
4: AI3
6: Multi-command
7: SIMPLE PLC MODE
8: PID
109

There are a total of 10 main frequency setting channels:
 0: Digital setting (non-retentive at power failure)
The initial value of the set frequency is F0-08 (preset frequency). You can change the
set frequency via keys▲ and ▼ on the keyboard (or UP/DOWN of input terminals)
When the inverter is powered on after power failure, the set frequency is resumed to
the value in F0-08.
 1: Digital setting (retentive at power failure)
The initial value of the set frequency is F0-08 (preset frequency). You can change the
set frequency via keys▲ and ▼ on the keyboard (or UP/DOWN of input terminals)
When the inverter is powered on after power failure, the set frequency is the value
memorized at the moment of the last power failure.
Please note that F0-23 (Digital setting frequency retentive selection at stop)
determines whether the set frequency is memorized or cleared when the inverter
stops. It is related to stop rather than power failure.
 2: AI1 (0V-10V voltage input)

 3: AI2 (0V-10V voltage input or 4mA-20mA current input determined by J8 jumper)
 4: AI3 (0V-10V voltage input)
The frequency is decided by analog inputs. The MD380 control board provides two AI
terminals (AI1, AI2). Another AI terminal (AI3) is provided by the I/O extension card.
The user can freely select the corresponding curve between the input voltage of AI1,
AI2 and AI3 and target frequency.
MD380 provides 5 curves, three of which are linear (point-point) correspondence and
two of which are four-point corresponding curves. The user can set the curves via
parameters F4-13 to F4-27 and Group F6.
F4-33 is used to select curves for AI1, AI2 and AI3. When AI is used as frequency
setting channel, voltage/current input corresponding value 100% corresponds to
F0-10 (maximum frequency).
 5: Pulse setting (DI5)
The frequency is set via DI5 (high-speed pulse). The pulse setting signal specification
is 9V-30V (voltage range) and 0kHz-100kHz (frequency range). The pulse input
corresponding value 100% corresponds to F0-10 (maximum frequency).
 6. Multi-speed
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of DI statuses. MD380

supports up to 16-speed via 16 statuses of 4 DI terminals (DI12-DI15) in Group FC.
Multi-speed is the percentage of F0-10 (maximum frequency).
If DI terminals are used as multi-speed function, you need to perform related setting
in group F4.
110

 7. Simple PLC Mode
When applying Simple PLC Mode as the frequency source, the inverter running
frequency can be switched over amongst 1 to 16 speeds. The user can set the
respective holding time and acceleration/deceleration time of the 1 to 16 speeds. For
details, refer to description of Group FC.
 8. PID
PID control is generally used in on-site closed loop control, such as constant pressure
closed loop control and constant tension closed loop control.
When applying PID as the frequency source, you need to set parameters of PID
function in group FA.
 9. Via communication
If point-point communication is enabled and the salve receives data as frequency

source, use the master transmission data as the setting value. For details, see the
description of group A8.
If Profibus-DP is valid and PZD1 is used for frequency setting, directly use the data
transmitted by PDZ1. The data format is -100.00% to 100.00%. 100% corresponds to
Otherwise, the data is given by host computer via communication address 0x1000.
The data format is -100.00% to 100.00%. 100.00% corresponds to F0-10 (maximum
frequency).
MD380 supports four host computer communication modes: Modbus, Profibus-DP,

CANopen and CANlink. They cannot be used simultaneously.
If communication is selected, the communication card must be installed. MD380

provides 4 optional communication cards and the user can select a proper one. If
Modbus, Profibus-DP or CANopen is selected, corresponding serial communication
protocol shall be selected based on F0-28.
The CANlink protocol is valid all along.
Function
Code
Auxiliary 0: Digital setting (preset frequency F0-08, you can
0
frequency make modification via UP/DOWN, non-retentive at
source Y power failure)
selection 1: Digital setting (preset frequency F0-08, you can
make modification via UP/DOWN, retentive at power
F0-04
failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
111

6: Multi-command
7: Simple PLC mode
8: PID
When the auxiliary frequency source is used as independent frequency setting channel
(frequency source switched over from X to Y), it is used in the same way as the main
frequency source X.
When the auxiliary frequency source is used for operation (frequency source is “X and Y
operation”, switched over between X(Y) and “X and Y operation”), pay attention to the
following aspects:
1. If the auxiliary frequency source is digital setting, the preset frequency (F0-08) does
not take effect. The user can directly make adjustment via keys▲ and ▼ on the
keyboard (or UP/DOWN of input terminals) on the basis of the set main frequency.
2. If the auxiliary frequency source is analog (AI1, AI2 and AI3) or pulse setting, the input
corresponding value 100% corresponds to main frequency X or F0-10 (maximum
frequency). You can set it in F0-03 and F0-04
3. If the auxiliary frequency source is pulse setting, it is similar to analog setting.
Main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y cannot be allocated

Note
with the same channel. That is, F0-03 and F0-04 cannot be set to the same value.
Function
Code
Auxiliary frequency Y selection for 0: Relative to maximum frequency 0
F0-05
X and Y operation 1: Relative to main frequency X
Auxiliary frequency Y for X and Y 0%-150% 0
F0-06
operation
If X and Y operation is selected, F0-05 and F0-06 are used to set the adjustment range of
auxiliary frequency source.
The user can set auxiliary frequency to be relative to either maximum frequency or main
frequency X. If relative to main frequency X, the setting range of the auxiliary frequency Y
varies with the main frequency X.
Function
Code
Frequency Unit’s Frequency source selection 0
F0-07
source selection digit
0 Main frequency source X
1 X and Y operation (operation relationship

determined by tens digit)
2 Switching between X and Y
112

3 Switching between X and “X and Y operation”
4 Switching between Y and “X and Y operation”
Tens digit X and Y operation relationship
0 X+Y
1 X-Y
2 Maximum
3 Minimum
You can select the frequency setting channel including X and Y operation via this
parameter. If the frequency source involves X and Y operation, you can add frequency
bias set in F0-21 to the X and Y operation result to flexibly satisfy various requirements.

Preset frequency 0.00-maximum frequency (valid when 50Hz
F0-08
frequency source is digital setting)
If the frequency source is digital setting or terminal UP/DOWN, the value of this parameter
is the initialized value of the inverter frequency (digital setting).

0: Directions are the same.
F0-09 Rotating direction 0
1: Directions are reverse.
You can change the motor rotating direction only by modifying this function code but not
changing motor wiring. Modifying this function code is equivalent to exchanging any two of
the motor’s (U, V, W) lines.
113

The motor will resume to original running direction after parameter initialized. Do not use
Note
this function in applications where motor rotating direction is prohibited after system
commissioning is complete.

Maximum
F0-10 50.00Hz-320.00Hz 50.00Hz
frequency
When AI terminals, pulse input terminals (DI5) and Multi-speed are used as frequency
source, the value 100% corresponds to F0-10.
The output frequency of MD380 can reach up to 3200Hz. To take both frequency
command resolution and frequency input range into consideration, you can select the
decimal point digits of frequency command via F0-22.
 If F0-22 is set to 1, the frequency command resolution is 0.1Hz. In this case, the
setting range of F0-10 is 50.0Hz-3200.0Hz.
 If F0-22 is set to 2, the frequency command resolution is 0.01Hz. In this case, the
setting range of F0-10 is 50.00Hz-3200.00Hz.
Modifying F0-22 will change the frequency resolution of all frequency related
Note
function codes.

0: Set by F0-12
1: AI1
Source of upper limit of 2: AI2
F0-11 0
output frequency 3: AI3
This parameter defines the source of upper limit of output frequency, such as digital
setting (F0-12), AI, pulse setting or via communication. If the upper limit of output
frequency is set via AI1, AI2, AI3, DI5 or communication, the setting is similar to main
frequency source X.
For example, to avoid runaway in torque control mode in winding application, the user can
set the upper limit of output frequency via analog input. When the inverter runs to the
upper limit, it will keep running at the upper limit of output frequency.

Upper limit of output Frequency lower limit (F0-14) to
F0-12 50.00Hz
frequency maximum frequency (F0-10)
This parameter is used to set the upper limit of output frequency.

0.00Hz to maximum frequency
F0-13 Upper limit offset 0.00 Hz
(F0-10)
114

If the source of upper limit of output frequency is analog or pulse setting, the final upper
limit of output frequency will be obtained by adding offset of the setting value (F0-13) to
the analog or pulse setting.

Lower limit of output 0.00Hz to upper limit of output
F0-14 0.00Hz
frequency frequency (F0-12)
If the frequency command is lower than the lower limit set in F0-14, the inverter can stop,
run at lower limit of output frequency or run at zero speed, determined by F8-14.
F0-15 Carrier frequency 0.5kHz-16.0kHz Model dependent
This parameter adjusts the inverter carrier frequency, helping to lower motor noise,
avoiding the resonance of the mechanical system, and reducing the leakage current to the
earth and the interference generated by the inverter.
If the carrier frequency is low, the current high harmonic output increases, the power loss
of the motor increases, and the motor temperature rise also increases.
If the carrier frequency is high, the power loss of the motor declines, and the motor
temperature rise also declines. But the inverter eyes an increase in power loss,
temperature rise and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the following performances:
Carrier frequency Low High

Motor noise Large Small
Output current waveform Bad Good
Motor temperature rise High Low
Inverter temperature rise Low High
Leakage current Small Large
External radiation interference Small Large
The factory setting of carrier frequency depends on the inverter power. Although the user
can modify the carrier frequency, higher carrier frequency than factory setting will lead to
an increase in temperature rise of the inverter heatsink. In this case, derate the inverter.
Otherwise, the inverter may get overheated and alarm.

Carrier frequency adjustment 0: No
F0-16 0
with temperature 1: Yes
This parameter indicates the inverter automatically lowers the carrier frequency when it
detects high temperature of heatsink. When the heatsink temperature becomes normal,
the inverter resumes the carrier frequency to the setting value.
115

0.00s-650.00s (F0-19=2)
Model
F0-17 Acceleration time 1 0.0s-6500.0s (F0-19=1)
dependent
0s-65000s (F0-19=0)
0.00s-650.00s (F0-19=2)
Model
F0-18 Deceleration time 1 0.0s-6500.0s (F0-19=1)
dependent
0s-65000s (F0-19=0)
Acceleration time indicates the time required by the inverter to accelerate from 0Hz to
F0-25 (acceleration/deceleration base frequency).
Deceleration time indicates the time required by the inverter to decelerate from F0-25
(acceleration/deceleration base frequency) to 0Hz, shown as below:
MD380 provides totally four groups of acceleration/deceleration time for selection. The
user can perform switchover via DI terminal.
Group 1: F0-17, F0-18
Group 2: F8-03, F8-04
Group 3: F8-05, F8-06
Group 4: F8-07, F8-08

0:1s
F0-19 Acceleration/Deceleration time unit 1: 0.1s 1
2: 0.01s
To satisfy requirements of different applications, MD380 provides three groups of

acceleration/deceleration time units (1s, 0.1s and 0.01s).
Modifying this parameter will make the displayed decimal point digits changed and
Note
corresponding acceleration/deceleration time also changed.
116

Frequency bias of auxiliary frequency 0.00Hz-Maximum

F0-21 0.00Hz
source for X and Y operation frequency (F0-10)
This parameter is only valid when the frequency source selection involves X and Y
operation. The frequency bias set in F0-21 is added to the X and Y operation result to
flexibly satisfy various requirements.

1: 0.1Hz
F0-22 Frequency command resolution 2
2: 0.01Hz
This parameter is used to set the resolution of all frequency related functions.
If the resolution is 0.1Hz, MD380 can output up to 3200Hz. If the resolution is 0.01Hz,
MD380 can output up to 600.00Hz.
 Modifying this parameter will make decimal point digits of all frequency related
Note
parameters changed and corresponding frequency values also changed.
 When resuming factory setting, this parameter is not resumed.

Selection of digital setting frequency 1: No retentive
F0-23 2
retentive upon power failure 2: Retentive
This parameter is only valid when the frequency source is digital setting.
If F0-23 is set to 1, the digital setting frequency value resumes to the value of F0-08
(preset frequency) after the inverter stops. The modification via keys▲, ▼ or terminals UP,
DOWN is cleared.
If F0-23 is set to 2, the digital setting frequency value is the set frequency at the moment
of the inverter stop. The modification via keys▲, ▼ or terminals UP, DOWN is held.

F0-24 Motor parameter group selection 0
MD380 supports the inverter driving 4 motors at different time. The 4 motors can set motor
nameplate parameters respectively, perform motor parameter tuning independently, select
different control modes and set the parameters related to running performance solely.
Motor parameter group 1 corresponds to group F1 and group F2. Motor parameter group
2, Motor parameter group 3 and Motor parameter group 4 correspond to group A2, group
A3 and group A4, respectively.
The user can select the current motor parameter group via F0-24 or DI terminal. If the
motor parameter group is selected via F0-24 and DI terminal simultaneously, the DI
selection is preferred.
117


0: Maximum frequency (F0-10)
F0-25 1: Set frequency 0
base frequency
2: 100Hz
The acceleration/deceleration time indicates the time from 0Hz to the frequency set in
F0-25. If F0-25 is set to 1, the acceleration/deceleration time is related to set frequency. If
the set frequency changes frequently, the motor’s acceleration/deceleration also changes.

Base frequency of UP/DOWN 0: Running frequency
F0-26 0
modification during running 1: Set frequency
This parameter is only valid when the frequency source is digital setting.
It is used to set the base frequency based on which the set frequency will be reached via
keys▲, ▼ or terminals UP, DOWN. If the running frequency and set frequency are
different, the inverter’s performance during the acceleration/deceleration process will vary
with the setting of F0-26.
Function
Code
Operation panel binding to frequency
source selection
0: No binding
1: Digital setting frequency source
2: AI1
3: AI2
Unit’s digit
4: AI3
Command source
6: Multi-command
F0-27 binding to 000
7: Simple PLC
frequency source
8: PID
Terminal command binding to frequency
Ten’s digit source selection
Communication command binding to
Hundred’s
frequency source selection
digit
This parameter is used to bind the 3 running command sources with the 9 frequency
setting channels, facilitating to implement synchronous switchover.
The meaning of frequency setting channels is the same as that of main frequency source
X selection (F0-03). Different running command channels can bind to the same frequency
setting channel.
118

If the command source has the binding frequency source and when the command source
is effective, the frequency source set in F0-03 to F0-07 no longer takes effect.

0: Modbus protocol
Serial communication protocol
F0-28 1: Profibus-DP bridge 0
selection
2: CANopen bridge
MD380 supports Modbus, Profibus-DP and CANopen. Please set this parameter correctly
based on the actual need.
Group F1: 1st Motor Parameters
Function
Code
Motor type
F1-00 1: Variable frequency asynchronous motor 1
selection
2: Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Model
F1-01 Rated power 0.1kW-1000.0kW
dependent
Model
F1-02 Rated voltage 1V-2000V
dependent
0.01A-655.35A (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-03 Rated current
0.1A-6553.5A (inverter power>55kW) dependent
Model
F1-04 Rated frequency 0.01Hz-Maximum frequency
dependent
Rated rotating Model
F1-05 1rpm-65535rpm
speed dependent
Note  Please set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether
V/F control or vector control is adopted.
 To ensure better V/F or vector control performance, you need to perform motor
tuning. And the tuning accuracy depends on correct setting of motor nameplate
parameters
Function
Code
Stator resistance 0.001Ω-65.535Ω (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-06
(asynchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter power>55kW) dependent
Rotor resistance 0.001Ω-65.535Ω (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-07
Leakage inductive
0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-08 Reactance
0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter power>55kW) dependent
Mutual inductive 0.1mH-6553.5mH (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-09
Reactance 0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter power>55kW) dependent
119

No-load current 0.01A-F1-03 (inverter power<=55kW) Model

F1-10
(asynchronous motor) 0.1A-F1-03 (inverter power>55kW) dependent
F1-06 to F-10 are asynchronous motor parameters. The motor nameplate does not
provide these parameters and you can get them via motor tuning. Only F1-06 to F1-08
can be obtained through motor static tuning. But through motor complete tuning, encoder
phase sequence and current loop PI can be obtained besides F6-01 to F6-10.
Each time the motor rated power (F1-01) or the motor rated voltage (F1-02) is changed,
the inverter will automatically recover values of F1-06 to F1-10 to the default standard
motor parameters (Y series asynchronous motor).
If it is impossible to tune the motor on site, manually input the value of these parameters
according to the parameters provided by motor manufacturer.
Function
Code
F1-16
(synchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter power>55kW) dependent
Shaft D inductance 0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-17
(synchronous motor) 0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter power>55kW) dependent
Shaft Q inductance 0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter power<=55kW) Model
F1-18
(synchronous motor) 0.001mH-65.535mH (inverter power>55kW) dependent
F1-20 0.1V-6553.5V
F1-16 to F-20 are synchronous motor parameters. The nameplate of most synchronous
motors does not provide these parameters and you can get the four parameters by
selecting “synchronous motor no-load tuning”. Through “synchronous motor with-load
tuning” only the encoder phase sequence and installation angle can be obtained.
Each time the motor rated power (F1-01) or the motor rated voltage (F1-02) is changed,
the inverter will automatically modify the value of F1-16 to F1-20.
Also, you can directly set the parameters based on the data provided by the synchronous
motor manufacturer.
F1-27 The number of encoder pulses 1-65535 1024
This parameter is used to set the number of pulses of ABZ or UVW incremental encoder
per revolution. In FVC mode, set the number of encoder pulses properly. Otherwise, the
motor will not run normally.

F1-28 The type of encoder 0
120

2: Rotary encoder
3: SIN/COS encoder
MD380 supports multiple types of encoder that need to be connected to different PG

cards. Please select proper PG card during the use. Any of the five encoder types is
applicable to synchronous motor. But only ABZ incremental encoder and rotary encoder
are applicable to asynchronous motor.
Once the installation of PG card is complete, set F1-28 properly based on the actual
condition. Otherwise, the inverter cannot run normally.

A, B phase sequence of ABZ 0: Forward
F1-30 0
incremental encoder 1: Reserve
This parameter is valid for ABZ incremental encoder (F1-28=0) only and is used for set the
phase sequence of signals A, B of ABZ incremental encoder.
It is valid for both asynchronous motor and synchronous motor. The A, B phase sequence
can be obtained via “asynchronous motor complete tuning” or “synchronous motor
no-load tuning”.
F1-31 Encoder installation angle 0.0°-359.9° 0.0°
This parameter is valid for synchronous motor only. It is also valid for ABZ incremental
encoder, UVW incremental encoder, rotary encoder and wiring saving UVW encoder, but
invalid for SIN/COS encoder.
It can be obtained by synchronous motor no-load or with-load tuning. After the installation
of synchronous motor is complete, perform motor tuning. Otherwise, the motor cannot run
normally.

U, V, W phase sequence of UVW 0: Forward
F1-32 0
encoder 1: Reverse
F1-33 UVW encoder angle bias 0.0°-359.9° 0.0°
These two parameters are valid only when UVW encoder is applied to synchronous motor.
They can be obtained by synchronous motor no-load or with-load tuning. After the
installation of synchronous motor is complete, perform motor tuning. Otherwise, the motor
cannot run normally.
121

The number of pole-pairs of

F1-34 1-65535 1
rotary encoder
If rotary encoder is applied, set the number of pole-pairs properly.

F1-36 0.0s
This parameter is used to set the time on detecting encoder wire break fault. If it is set to
0.0s, the inverter does not detect encoder wire break fault. If the inverter detects encoder
wire break fault and the duration exceeds the time set in F1-36, the inverter reports
ERR20.

0: No tuning
F1-37 Tuning selection 2: Asynchronous motor complete tuning 0
11: Synchronous motor with-load tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load tuning
 0: No tuning
Tuning is prohibited
 1: Asynchronous motor static tuning
It is applicable to the applications where complete tuning cannot be performed since

asynchronous motor must be connected with the load
To perform static tuning, properly set the type of motor and motor nameplate
parameters F1-00 to F1-05 first. Then set F1-37 to 1. Finally press key RUN.
The inverter will obtain parameters (F1-06 to F1-08) from static tuning.
 2: Asynchronous motor complete tuning
The asynchronous motor complete tuning requires the motor to be disconnected from
the load. During the process of complete tuning, the inverter performs static tuning
first and then accelerates to 80% of the motor rated frequency based on acceleration
time (F0-17). The inverter keeps running for some time and then decelerates to stop
based on deceleration time (F0-18).
To perform complete tuning, properly set the type of motor, motor nameplate
parameters F1-00 to F1-05, the type of encoder and the number of encoder pulses
(F1-27, F1-28) first. Then set F1-37 to 2. Finally press key RUN.
The inverter will obtain motor parameters (F1-06 to F1-10), A, B phase sequence of
ABZ encoder (F1-30) and vector control current loop PI parameters (F2-13 to F2-16)
from complete tuning.
 11: Synchronous motor with-load tuning

122

It is applicable to the applications where synchronous motor cannot be disconnected

from load. During with-load tuning, the motor rotates at the speed of 10PRM.
To perform with-load tuning, properly set the type of motor and motor nameplate
parameters F1-00 to F1-05 first. Then set F1-37 to 11. Finally press key RUN.
The inverter will obtain initial position angle of synchronous motor from with-load
tuning. Before the first use of synchronous motor after installation, perform motor
tuning.
 12: Synchronous motor no-load tuning
If motor can be disconnected from load, synchronous motor no-load tuning is

recommended, which will ensure better running performance compared with
with-load tuning.
During the process of no-load tuning, the inverter performs with-load tuning first and
then accelerates to 80% of the motor rated frequency based on acceleration time
(F0-17). The inverter keeps running for some time and then decelerates to stop
based on deceleration time (F0-18).
To perform no-load tuning, properly set the type of motor, motor nameplate
parameters F1-00 to F1-05, the type of encoder and the number of encoder pulses
(F1-27, F1-28) and the number of pole-pairs of rotary encoder (F1-34) first. Then set
F1-37 to 12. Finally press key RUN.
The inverter will obtain motor parameters (F1-16 to F1-20), encoder related
parameters (F1-30 to F1-33) and vector control current loop PI parameters (F2-13 to
F2-16).
Motor tuning can only be performed in operation panel mode.

Note
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Group F2 is valid for vector control, and invalid for V/F control.
Function
Code
F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain 1 0-100 30
F2-01 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s-10.00s 0.50s
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 5.00Hz
F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain 2 0-100 15
F2-04 Speed loop integral time 2 0.01s-10.00s 1.00s
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to maximum output frequency 10.00Hz
Speed loop PI parameters vary with the inverter running frequency.
 If the running frequency is F2-02 (switchover frequency 1) or less, the speed loop PI
parameters are F2-00 and F2-01.
123

 If the running frequency is F2-05 (switchover frequency 2) or more, the speed loop PI
parameters are F2-03 and F2-04.
 If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters
are obtained from the linear, shown as below:
The speed dynamic response characteristics of the vector control can be adjusted by
setting the proportional coefficient and integration time of the speed regulator. Increasing
the proportional gain or reducing the integration time can accelerate the dynamic
response of the speed loop. However, if the proportional gain is too large or the integration
time is too small, it will cause the oscillation of the system.
 Recommended Adjustment Method
If the factory settings cannot meet the requirement, fine tuning is suggested. Increase the
proportional gain first so as to ensure no oscillation of the system, and then reduce the
integration time to ensure that the system has quick responsiveness and small overshoot.
Note Improper PI parameter setting may cause too large speed overshoot. Over-voltage
fault may occur when the overshoot drops.
Function
Code
F2-06 Vector control slip gain 50%-200% 100%
For SVC, this parameter is used to adjust the motor speed accuracy. When the motor with
load runs at too low speed, enlarge it, and vice versa.
For FVC, this parameter is used to adjust the output current of the inverter with same load.
Function
Code
F2-07 Time constant of speed loop filter 0.000s-0.100s 0.000s
In the vector control mode, the output of speed loop regulator is torque current command.
This parameter is used to filter the torque command. It needs no adjustment generally and
124

this filter time can be increased in case of big speed fluctuation. In case of motor
oscillation, this parameter shall be reduced properly.
If the time constant of speed loop filter is small, the output torque of the inverter may
fluctuate greatly, but the response is quick.
Function
Code
F2-08 Vector control over-excitation gain 0-200 64
During the deceleration of the inverter, over-excitation can restrain the rise of bus voltage
so as to avoid occurrence of over-voltage fault. Bigger the over-excitation is, better
restraining result is obtained.
The over-excitation gain needs to be enlarged if the inverter is liable to over-voltage error
during deceleration. But too big over-excitation gain may lead to an increase in output
current. So set F2-08 to proper value during applications.
Set the over-excitation gain to 0 in the applications where the inertia is small (voltage will
not rise during motor deceleration) or where there is braking resistor.
Function
Code
0: F2-10
1: AI1
Torque upper limit source in speed 2: AI2
F2-09 0
control mode 3: AI3
Digital setting of torque upper limit in
F2-10 0.0%-200.0% 150.0%
speed control mode
In the speed control mode, the maximum output torque of the inverter is controlled by
F2-09. If the torque upper limit is set via analog, pulse and communication, the input
corresponding value 100% corresponds to F2-10. 100% of F2-10 corresponds to the
inverter rated torque.
For details on setting of AI1, AI2 and AI3, see description of AI curve in group F4.
For details on pulse setting, see description of F4-28 to F4-32.
In the condition that the torque upper limit is set via communication, if point-point
communication is enabled and the slave considers the received data as torque setting,
directly sends the torque from the master as digital setting.
Otherwise, write in -100.00% to 100.00% via communication address 0x1000 from host
computer. 100.0% corresponds to F2-10. MODBUS, CANopen, CANlink and Profibus-DP
are all supported.
125


F2-13 Excitation adjustment proportion gain 0-20000 2000
F2-14 Excitation adjustment integral gain 0-20000 1300
F2-15 Torque adjustment proportion gain 0-20000 2000
F2-16 Torque adjustment integral gain 0-20000 1300
These are vector control current loop PI parameters, which are obtained from
asynchronous complete tuning or synchronous motor no-load tuning. The user does not
need to modify them.
Please note that too big current loop PI gain may lead to oscillation of the whole control
loop. Thus when the current oscillates or torque fluctuates greatly, manually decrease the
proportion gain or integral gain here.

F2-18 1: Direct calculation 0
weakening mode
2: Adjustment
F2-19 50%-500% 100%
weakening degree
F2-20 Maximum field weakening current 1%-300% 50%
F2-21 10%-500% 100%
adjustment gain
F2-22 Field weakening integral multiple 2-10 2
These parameters are used to set synchronous motor field weakening control.
If F2-18 is set to 0, synchronous motor field weakening control is disabled. In this case,
the maximum rotating speed is related to the inverter bus voltage. If the motor’s maximum
rotating speed cannot satisfy the user’s requirement, enable the field weakening function
to raise the speed.
MD380 provides two field weakening modes: direct calculation and automatic adjustment.
 In direct calculation mode, directly calculate the current that needs to be

demagnetized and adjust the demagnetized current (F2-19) manually. Smaller the
demagnetized current is, smaller total output current is. But this may not get the
desired field weakening result.
 In automatic adjustment mode, the most proper demagnetized current is selected

automatically. This may influence the system dynamic performance or cause
instability.
The adjustment speed of field weakening current can be changed by changing F2-21 and
F2-22. But too quick adjustment may cause instability. Thus do not modify them manually.
Group F3: V/F Control Parameters
Group F2 is valid for V/F control, and invalid for vector control.
126

It is applicable to low load applications (fan or pump) or applications where one motor
drive multiple motors or where the inverter power and motor power have big difference.

0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2 power law
4: 1.4 power law
F3-00 V/F curve setting 2000
6: 1.6 power law
8: 1.8 power law
9: Reserved
10: V/F separated mode
11: V/F half separated mode
 0: Linear V/F
It is applicable to common constant torque load.
 1: Multi-point V/F
It is applicable to special load such as dehydrator and centrifuge. Any V/f curve can
be obtained by setting parameters (F3-03 to F3-08).
 2: Square V/F
It is applicable to centrifugal loads such as fan and pump.
 3-8: V/f curve between linear V/F and square V/F
 10: V/F separated mode
In this case, the inverter output frequency and output voltage are independent. The
output frequency is determined by frequency source, and output voltage is
determined by (V/F separated voltage source).
It is applicable to induction heating, inverse power supply and torque motor control.
 11: V/F half separated mode
In this case, V and F are proportional and the proportional relationship can be set in
F3-13. The relationship between V and F are also related to the motor rated voltage
and rated frequency in Group F1.
If the voltage source is X (0-100%), the relationship between the inverter output
voltage V and frequency F is V/F=2 * X * (motor rated voltage) / (motor rated
frequency).

F3-01 Torque boost 0.0%-30% Model dependent
Cutoff frequency
F3-02 0.00Hz-maximum output frequency 50.00Hz
of torque boost
127

To compensate the low frequency torque characteristics of V/F control, you can boost the
output voltage of the inverter at low frequency via F3-01.
If the torque boost is set to too large, the motor may be overheated, and the inverter may
suffer over-current.
For the relatively large load, it is recommended to increase this parameter. For the small
loads, decrease it. If it is set to 0.0, the inverter will adopt auto torque boost. In this case,
the inverter automatically calculates the torque boost value based on parameters
including the stator resistance of the motor.
F3-02 indicates that under this frequency, torque boost is valid, and torque boost
becomes invalid when this frequency is exceeded, shown as below:
Function
Code
F3-03 Multi-point V/F frequency 1 (F1) 0.00Hz-F3-05 0.00Hz
F3-04 Multi-point V/F voltage 1 (V1) 0.0%-100.0% 0.0%
F3-05 Multi-point V/F frequency 2 (F2) F3-03-F3-07 0.00Hz
F3-05 to motor rated frequency (F1-04)
F3-07 Multi-point V/F frequency 3 (F3) Note: The rated frequency of the 0.00Hz
nd rd th
2 /3 /4 motor is A2-04/A3-04/A4-04.
These six parameters are used to define the multi-speed V/F curve.
Multi-point V/F curve is set based on the motor’s load characteristic. Note that V1<V2<V3
and F1<F2<F3. At low frequency, higher voltage may cause the motor to be overheated
or even burnt out and cause over-current stall or over-current protection of the inverter.
128

Function
Code
F3-09 V/F slip compensation gain 0%-200.0% 0.0%
This parameter is only valid for asynchronous motor.
It can compensate the motor rotating speed slip when the load of asynchronous motor
rises so as to stabilize the motor speed in case of load change. If F3-09 is set to 100%, it
indicates that the compensation when the motor is with rated load is the motor rated slip.
The motor rated slip is obtained through calculation based on motor rated frequency and
motor rated speed in group F1.
Generally, if the motor rotating speed is different from the target speed, slightly adjust this
parameter.

F3-10 V/F over-excitation gain 0-200 64
During the deceleration of the inverter, over-excitation can restrain the rise of bus voltage
so as to avoid occurrence of over-voltage fault. Bigger the over-excitation is, better
restraining result is obtained.
The over-excitation gain needs to be enlarged if the inverter is liable to over-voltage error
during deceleration. But too big over-excitation gain may lead to an increase in output
current. So set F3-09 to proper value during applications.
Set the over-excitation gain to 0 in the applications where the inertia is small (voltage will
not rise during motor deceleration) or where there is braking resistor.
F3-11 V/F oscillation suppression gain 0-200 64
129

Set this parameter to the value as small as possible in the prerequisite of suppressing
oscillation efficiently so as to avoid influence on V/F control.
Set it to 0 for this gain if the motor has no oscillation. Only when the motor has obvious
oscillation, can this gain be properly increased. Bigger the gain is, better oscillation
suppression result will be obtained.
If oscillation suppression function is enabled, parameters (motor rated current and no-load
current) must be correct. Otherwise, desired V/F oscillation suppression effect will be not
good.

0: Digital setting (F3-14)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
F3-13 5: Multi-speed 0
source
6: Simple PLC mode
7: PID
100.0% corresponds to motor rated
voltage (F1-02, A4-02, A5-02, A6-02)
F3-14 0V-Motor rated voltage 0V
source digital setting
V/F separation is generally applied in applications such as induction heating, inverse

power supply and motor torque control.
If V/F separated control is enabled, the output voltage can be set in F3-14 or via analog,
multi-speed, simple PLC mode, PID or communication. If you set output voltage via
analog, multi-speed, simple PLC mode, PID or communication, 100% corresponds to
motor rated voltage. If negative percentage is selected, take its absolute value as effective
setting.
 0: Digital setting (F3-14)
The output voltage is set directly in F3-14.
 1: AI1; 2: AI2; 3: AI3
The output voltage is determined by AI terminals.
The output voltage is determined by pulse terminal (DI5).
Pulse setting specification: voltage range (9V-30V), Frequency range (0kHz-100kHz)
 5: Multi-speed
130

If the voltage source is multi-speed, parameters in group F4 and FC must be set to

determine the corresponding relationship between setting signal and setting voltage.
100.0% in group FC corresponds to the motor rated voltage.
 6: Simple PLC mode
If the voltage source is simple PLC mode, parameters in group FC must be set to
determine the setting output voltage.
 7: PID
The output voltage is generated based on PID closed loop. For details, see
description of PID in group FA.
 8: Via communication
The output voltage is set via host computer.
Selection of V/F separated voltage source is similar to that of frequency source. For
details, see F0-03. The corresponding value 100.0% corresponds to the motor rated
voltage. If the corresponding value is negative, take its absolute value.

F3-15 V/F separated voltage rise time 0.0s-1000.0s 0.0s
This parameter indicates the time required for the output voltage rising from 0V to the
motor rated voltage, shown as below:
Group F4: Input Terminals
MD380 is configured with 5 DI terminals (DI5 can be used as pulse input channel) and 2
AI terminals. The optional extension card allows you to have another 5 DI terminals
(DI6-DI10) and 1 AI terminal (AI3).
Function Code Name Default Remark

F4-00 DI1 function selection 1 (Forward RUN) Standard
131

Function Code Name Default Remark

F4-01 DI2 function selection 4 (Forward JOG) Standard
F4-02 DI3 function selection 9 (Fault Reset) Standard
F4-03 DI4 function selection 12 (Multi-speed 2) Standard
F4-04 DI5 function selection 13 (Multi-speed 2) Standard
F4-05 DI6 function selection 0 Extended
Value Function Description

0 No function You can set reserved DI to 0 so as to avoid malfunction.
1 Forward RUN (FWD) Forward or reverse RUN of the inverter is determined by DI.
2 Reverse RUN (REV)
The DI allocated with this function determines the inverter
3 Three-line control
three-line control. For details, see F4-11.
4 Forward JOG (FJOG) FJOG indicates forward JOG running, while RJOG
indicates reverse JOG running. The JOG frequency, JOG
5 Reverse JOG (RJOG) acceleration time and JOG deceleration time are described
in F8-00, F8-01 and F8-02.
6 Terminal UP If the frequency is determined by external terminals, they
are used as incremental and decrement commands for
frequency modification.
7 Terminal DOWN
When the frequency source is digital setting, they are used
to adjust the frequency.
The inverter locks the output. This time the motor is out of
8 Coast to stop the control of the inverter during the stop process. It has the
same meaning as the coast to stop described in F6-10.
It is external fault reset function via terminal, the same as
9 Fault reset (RESET) the function of RESET key on the operation panel. Remote
fault reset can be realized via this function.
The inverter decelerates to stop, but all the running
parameters are all memorized, such as PLC parameter,
10 RUN pause swing frequency parameter and PID parameter. After this
function is disabled, the inverter resumes to the status
before stopping.
If this signal is sent to the inverter, the inverter reports
11 External fault NO input ERR15 and acts based on fault protection mode. For more
details, see F9047.
12 Multi-speed terminal 1 16 speeds or 16 other command settings can be realized
13 Multi-speed terminal 2 through the combination of 16 statuses of these four
14 Multi-speed terminal 3 terminals.
132


15 Multi-speed terminal 4
Acceleration/Deceleration 4 types of acceleration/deceleration time can be realized
16
time selection terminal 1 through the combination of two statuses of these two
Acceleration/Deceleration terminals.
17
time selection terminal 2
Frequency source It is used to perform switchover between two frequency
18
switchover sources according to the setting in F0-07.
If the frequency source is digital setting, this terminal is
UP and DOWN setting clear used to clear the frequency value modified by
19
(terminal, operation panel) terminal/operation panel UP/DOWN, resuming the set
frequency to the value of F0-08.
If the command source is set to terminal control (F0-02=1),
it is used to perform switchover between terminal control
RUN command and operation panel control.
20
switching terminal If the command source is set to communication control
(F0-02=2), it is used to perform switchover between
communication control and operation panel control.
It ensures the inverter not to be affected by external signals
21 (except STOP command) and maintain the current
prohibited
frequency.
PID is inactive temporarily. The inverter maintains the
22 PID pause current frequency output without PID adjustment of
frequency source.
PLC pauses during the running process. When the
23 PLC status reset resuming running, the inverter is restored to the
initial status of simple PLC mode via this terminal.
The inverter outputs central frequency. Swing
24 Swing pause
frequency pauses.
25 Counting input It is the input terminal that counts pulses.
26 Counting reset Clear the counter status.
27 Length count input It is the input terminal that counts the length.
28 Length reset Clear the length.
The inverter is prohibited to perform torque control, entering
29 Torque control prohibited
speed control mode.
Pulse input (enabled only for DI5 is used for pulse input
30
DI5)
31 Reserved Reserved
Once this terminal is enabled, the inverter directly switches
32 Immediate DC braking
to the DC braking status.
External fault normally After the external fault signal is sent to the inverter, the
33
closed input inverter reports ERR15 and stops.
Frequency modification Once this terminal is enabled, the inverter does not respond
34
enabled to any frequency change.
133


Once this terminal is enabled, the PID action direction is
35 Reverse PID action direction
reversed to the direction set in FA-03.
In operation panel mode, it can be used to stop the inverter,
36 External STOP terminal 1
equivalent to the function of key STOP on the panel.
It is used to perform switchover between terminal control
Control command and communication control. If the command source is
37
switchover terminal 2 terminal control, once this terminal is enabled, the system
will switch to communication control, and vice versa.
Once this terminal is enabled, the integral adjustment
38 PID integral pause function pauses. But the proportional and differentiation
adjustment functions are still valid.
Switchover between main Once this terminal is enabled, the frequency source X is
39 frequency source X and replaced by preset frequency (F0-08).
preset frequency
Switchover between Once this terminal is enabled, the frequency source Y is
40 auxiliary frequency source Y replaced by preset frequency (F0-08).
and preset frequency
41 Motor selection terminal 1 Switchover among the four groups of motor parameters can
42 Motor selection terminal 2 be realized via the four statuses of these two terminals
When the PID parameters switchover condition is DI
terminal (FA-18=1), if the terminal is disabled, the PID
43 PID parameters switchover
parameters are FA-05 to FA-07. If this terminal is enabled,
the PID parameters are FA-15 to FA-17.
44 User defined fault 1 If these two terminals are enabled, the inverter reports
ERR27 and ERR28, respectively, and acts based on the
45 User defined fault 2
setting in F9-49(fault protection action selection).
It makes the inverter switch between speed control and
torque control. If this terminal is disabled, the inverter runs
Speed/torque control
46 in the mode set in A0-00 (speed/torque control selection). If
switchover
this terminal is enabled, the inverter switches to the other
control mode.
If this terminal is enabled, the inverter stops as the fastest
speed. During the stop process, the current all along stands
47 Emergency stop
at the set current upper limit. This function is used to satisfy
the requirement of stopping inverter in emergency state.
In any control mode (operation panel, terminal,
communication), it can be used to make the inverter
48 External STOP terminal 2
decelerate to stop. In this case, the deceleration time is
deceleration time 4.
If this terminal is enabled, the inverter decelerates to the
49 Deceleration DC braking initial frequency of stop DC braking and then switches to DC
braking status.
50 Clear the current running If this terminal is enabled, the inverter’s current running time
134


time is cleared. This function must be supported by F8-42 (timing
running) and F8-53 (Current running time reaching).
The four multi-speed terminals can combine 16 statues, corresponding to 16 speeds,

shown as below:
Corresponding
K4 K3 K2 K1 Speed Setting
Parameter
OFF OFF OFF OFF Speed 0 FC-00
OFF OFF OFF ON Speed 1 FC-01
OFF OFF ON OFF Speed 2 FC-02
OFF OFF ON ON Speed 3 FC-03
OFF ON OFF OFF Speed 4 FC-04
OFF ON OFF ON Speed 5 FC-05
OFF ON ON OFF Speed 6 FC-06
OFF ON ON ON Speed 7 FC-07
ON OFF OFF OFF Speed 8 FC-08
ON OFF OFF ON Speed 9 FC-09
ON OFF ON OFF Speed 10 FC-10
ON OFF ON ON Speed 11 FC-11
ON ON OFF OFF Speed 12 FC-12
ON ON OFF ON Speed 13 FC-13
ON ON ON OFF Speed 14 FC-14
ON ON ON ON Speed 15 FC-15
If the frequency source is multi-speed, value 100% of FC-00 to FC-15 corresponds to

Besides multi-speed function, it can be used as the setting source of the V/F separated
voltage source and setting source of process PID so as to satisfy the requirement on
switchover of different setting values.
Two terminals can combine four groups of acceleration/deceleration time, shown as

below:
Terminal Acceleration/Deceleration Corresponding

Terminal 2
1 Time Selection Parameters
OFF OFF Acceleration/Deceleration time F0-17, F0-18
1
OFF ON Acceleration/Deceleration time F8-03, F8-04
2
ON OFF Acceleration/Deceleration time F8-05, F8-06
3
ON ON Acceleration/Deceleration time F8-07, F8-08
4
135

Two terminals can combine four groups of motors, shown as below:
Terminal Corresponding
Terminal 2 Motor Selection
1 Parameters
OFF OFF Motor 1 Group F1, group F2
OFF ON Motor 2 Group A2
ON OFF Motor 3 Group A3
ON ON Motor 4 Group A4

F4-10 DI filter time 0.000s-1.000s 0.010s
It is used to set the software filter time of DI terminal status. If the DI terminal is liable to
interferences and may cause malfunction, increase this parameter value to enhance the
anti-interference capability. However, increase of DI filter time will reduce the response of
DI terminal.

0: Two-line 1
1: Two-line 2
F4-11 Terminal command mode 0
2: Three-line 1
3: Three-line 2
This parameter is used to the mode of controlling the inverter via external terminals. Here
takes three terminals (DI1, DI2 and DI3) from DI1-DI10 as external terminals. That is,
select functions of DI1, DI2 and DI3 by setting F4-00-F4-02.
 0: Two-line running mode 1
This mode is the most commonly used two-line mode, in which the forward/reverse
rotation of the motor is decided by DI1 and DI2. The parameters are set as below:
Function Name Value Function

Code Description
F4-11 Terminal command mode 0 Two-line 1
F4-00 DI1 function selection 1 Forward RUN (FWD)
F4-01 DI2 function selection 2 Reverse RUN (REV)
136

In such two-line mode, when K1 closes, the inverter runs in forward direction. When
K2 closes, the inverter runs in reverse direction. When K1 and K2 close or break
simultaneously, the inverter stops.
 1: Two-line 2
In this mode, DI1 is RUN enabled terminal, and DI2 determines the running direction.
The parameters are set as below:
Function Name Value Function Description

Code
F4-11 Terminal command mode 1 Two-line 2
F4-00 DI1 function selection 1 RUN enabled
F4-01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward and reverse
RUN
In such two-line mode, in the state of K1 closing, when K2 breaks, the inverter runs in
forward direction, and when K2 closes, the inverter runs in reverse direction. But if K1
breaks, the inverter stops.
 2: Three-line 1
In this mode, DI3 is enabled terminal. The direction is decided by DI1 and DI2. The
parameters are set as below:

Code
F4-11 Terminal command mode 2 Three-line 1
F4-02 DI3 function selection 2 Three-line control
137

In such three-line mode, in the state of SB1 closing, pressing SB2 makes the inverter
run in forward direction and pressing SB3 makes the inverter run in reverse direction.
But if K1 breaks, the inverter stops. During normal startup and running, SB1 must be
kept closed. The inverter’s running status is determined by the final actions of SB1,
SB2 and SB3.
 3: Three-line mode 2
In this mode, DI3 is enabled terminal. The direction is decided by DI1 and the
direction is decided by DI2. The parameters are set as below:

Code
F4-11 Terminal command mode 3 Three-line 2
F4-02 DI3 function selection 2 Three-line control
In such three-line mode, in the state of SB1 closing, pressing SB2 makes the inverter
run. If k breaks, the inverter runs in forward direction. If k closes, the inverter runs in
reverse direction. At the moments of SB1 breaking, the inverter stops. During normal
startup and running, SB1 must be kept closed. The inverter’s running status is
determined by the final actions of SB1, SB2 and SB3.

F4-12 Terminal UP/DOWN rate 0.01Hz/s-65.535Hz/s 1.00Hz/s
It is used to adjust the changing rate when setting the frequency via terminal UP/DOWN.
138

 If F0-22 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the setting range is

0.001Hz/s-65.535Hz/s.
 If F0-22 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the setting range is

0.01Hz/s-655.35Hz/s.

F4-13 AI1 minimum input 0.00V to F4-15 0.00V
AI1 minimum input -100.00%-100.0% 0.0%
F4-14
corresponding value
F4-15 AI1 maximum input F4-13 to 10.00V 10.00V
AI1 maximum input -100.00%-100.0% 100.0%
F4-16
corresponding value
F4-17 AI1 filter time 0.00s-10.00s 0.10s
These parameters are used to define the relationship between the analog input voltage
and the corresponding value. When the analog input voltage exceeds the maximum value
(F4-15), take the maximum value. When the analog input voltage is less than the
minimum value (F4-13), take the value set in F4-34 (AI less than minimum input setting
selection).
When the analog input is current input, 1mA current equals 0.5V voltage.
F4-17 is used to set the software filter time of AI1. If the analog is liable to interferences,
increase this parameter value so as to make the detected analog tend to stabilize.
However, increase of DI filter time will reduce the response of analog detection. Please
set F4-17 to proper value based on actual condition.
In different applications, 100% of analog input corresponds to different norminal values.

Refer to description of various applications for details.
Two typical setting examples are shown as below:
139


AI2 minimum input -100.00%-100.0% 0.0%
F4-19
corresponding value
AI2 maximum input -100.00%-100.0% 100.0%
F4-21
corresponding value

AI3 minimum input -100.00%-100.0% 0.0%
F4-24
corresponding value
AI3 maximum input -100.00%-100.0% 100.0%
F4-26
corresponding value
The method of setting AI2 and AI3 function is similar to that of setting AI1 function.

F4-28 Pulse minimum input 0.00kHz to F4-30 0.00kHz
Pulse minimum input -100.00%-100.0% 0.0%
F4-29
corresponding value
F4-30 Pulse maximum input F4-28 to 50.00kHz 50.00kHz
140


Pulse maximum input -100.00%-100.0% 100.0%
F4-31
corresponding value
F4-32 Pulse filter time 0.00s-10.00s 0.10s
These parameters are used to set the relationship between DI5 pulse input and
corresponding value. The pulse can only be input via DI5. The setting of this group is
similar to that of AI1 function.

Unit’s digit AI1 curve selection 321
Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 to F4-16)
AI curve Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00 to A6-07)
F4-33
selection Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08 to A6-15)
Ten’s digit AI2 curve selection
Hundred’s AI3 curve selection
digit Curve 1-curve 5 (same as AI1)
The unit’s digit, ten’s digit and hundred’s digit of this parameter are used to select the
corresponding curve of AI1, AI2 and AI3. Any of the five curves can be selected to AI1,
AI2 and AI3.
Curve 1, curve 2 and curve 3 are all 2-point curves, set in group F4. Curve 4 and curve 5
are both 4-point curves, set in group A6.
MD380 provides 2 AI terminals as standard. If you require AI3, use optional extension
card.
Function Setting Range

Name Default
Code
Unit’s digit AI1 less than minimum input 000
setting selection
0: Take the minimum value
AI less than
1: 0.0%
F4-34 minimum input
Ten’s digit AI2 less than minimum input
setting selection
(0, 1, same as AI1)
Hundred’s AI3 less than minimum input
digit (0, 1, same as AI1)
This parameter is used to determine the corresponding value when the analog input
voltage is less than the minimum value. The unit’s digit, ten’s digit and hundred’s digit of
this parameter corresponds to AI2, AI2 and AI3.
If F4-34 is set to 0, when analog input voltage is less than the minimum input, take the
minimum input corresponding value (F4-14, F4-19, F4-24).
141

If it is set to 1, when analog input voltage is less than the minimum input, take 0.0% as the
analog input corresponding value.

F4-35 DI1 delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
These parameters are used to set the delay time of the inverter when the status of DI
terminal changes.
Currently, only DI1, DI2 and DI3 have the delay time function.

Name Default
Code
Unit’s digit DI1 valid status selection 00000
0: High level valid
1: Low level valid
Ten’s digit DI2 valid status selection
(0, 1, same as DI1)
DI valid status
F4-38 Hundred’s digit DI3 valid status selection
selection 1
(0, 1, same as DI1)
Thousand’s digit DI4 valid status selection
(0, 1, same as DI1)
Ten thousand’s DI5 valid status selection
digit (0, 1, same as DI1)
Unit’s digit DI6 valid status selection 00000
(0, 1, same as DI1)
Ten’s digit DI7 valid status selection
(0, 1, same as DI1)
DI valid status Hundred’s digit DI8 valid status selection
F4-39
selection 2 (0, 1, same as DI1)
Thousand’s digit DI9 valid status selection
(0, 1, same as DI1)
Ten thousand’s DI10 valid status selection
digit (0, 1, same as DI1)
These parameters are used to set the DI valid selected mode.
 If high level is selected, the DI terminal is valid when being connected with COM. It is
invalid when it breaks.
 If low level is selected, the DI terminal is invalid when being connected with COM. It is
valid when it breaks.
Group F5: Output Terminals
MD380 is configured with 1 AO terminal, 1 DO terminal, 1 relay terminal and FM terminal
142

(selected as high-speed pulse output or open-collector open) as standard. If these output

terminals cannot satisfy requirements, please use optional I/O extension card that has 1
AO terminal (AO2), I relay terminal (relay 2) and 1 DO terminal (DO2).

FM terminal output 0: Pulse output (FMR) 0
F5-00
mode selection 1: Open-collector output (FMR)
FM terminal is programmable multiplexing terminal. It can be used as high-speed pulse

output (FMP), with maximum frequency of 50 kHz. Refer toF5-06 for relevant functions of
FMP. It can also be used as open collector open output (FMR).
Function Code Name Default

F5-01 FMR function selection (open-collector output terminal) 0
F5-02 Relay function selection (T/A-T/B-T/C) 2
F5-03 Extension card relay function selection (P/A-P/B-P/C) 0
F5-04 DO1 function selection (open-collector output terminal) 1
F5-05 Extension card DO2 function selection 4
These five function codes are used to select the function of the five digital output terminals.
T/A-T/B-T/C and P/A-P/B-P/C are the relays of the control board and the extension card,
respectively.
The functions of the output terminals are described as below:

0 No output The output terminal has no function
It indicates the inverter is running and has output frequency
1 Inverter running
(can be zero), and ON signal is output at this time.
When the inverter stops due to occurrence of a fault, it outputs
2 Fault output (stop)
the ON signal.
Frequency-level Please refer to F8-19 and F8-20 for details.
3
detection FDT1 output
4 Frequency reaching Please refer to F8-21 for details.
Running at zero speed If the inverter runs at the speed of 0, it outputs ON signal. If the
5 (no output in the state of inverter is in the stop state, the signal becomes OFF.
stop)
The inverter judges according to the motor overload warning
threshold before the motor overload protection action. If the
Motor overload
6 warning threshold is exceeded, the inverter outputs ON signal.
warning
For motor overload parameters, see parameters F9-00 to
F9-02.
Inverter overload The inverter outputs ON signal 10s before the inverter
7
warning overload protection action.
Set counting value ON signal is output when the counting value reaches the value
8
reaching set in FB-08.
9 Designated counting ON signal is output when the counting value reaches the value
143


value reaching set in FB-09. For the counting function, refer to group FB.
ON signal is output if the detected actual length
10 Length reaching
exceeds the value set in FB-05.
When simple PLC completes one cycle, a pulse
11 PLC cycle complete
signal with width of 250ms is output.
Accumulative running If the inverter accumulative running time exceeds the
12
time reaching time set in F8-17, ON signal is output.
If the set frequency exceeds the frequency upper limit
or lower limit and the inverter output frequency
13 Frequency limited
reaches the upper limit or lower limit, ON signal is
output.
In speed control mode, if the output torque reaches
14 Torque limited the torque limit value, the inverter enters the stall
protection state and meanwhile outputs ON signal.
If the inverter main circuit and control circuit become
15 Ready for RUN stabilized and the inverter detects no fault, it is ready
for RUN and outputs ON signal.
16 AI1>AI2 When AI1 is higher than AI2, ON signal is output.
Frequency upper limit If the running frequency reaches the upper limit, ON
17
reaching signal is output.
Frequency lower limit If the running frequency reaches the lower limit, ON
18 reaching (no output in signal is output. In the state of stop, the signal
the state of stop) becomes OFF.
Under-voltage status If the inverter is in under-voltage status, ON signal is
19
output output.
Communication Refer to the communication protocol.
20
setting
Running at zero speed 2 If the inverter output frequency is 0, ON signal is
23 (having output in the output. In the state of stop, the signal is still ON.
state of stop)
Accumulative If the inverter accumulative power-on time (F7-13)
24 power-on time exceeds the value set in F8-16, ON signal is output.
reaching
Frequency-level Refer to description of F8-28 and F8-29.
25
detection FDT2 output
Frequency 1 reaching Refer to description of F8-30 and F8-31.
26
output
Frequency 2 reaching Refer to description of F8-32 and F8-33.
27
output
Current 1 reaching Refer to description of F8-38 and F8-39
28
output
144


Current 2 reaching Refer to description of F8-40 and F8-41.
29
output
If the timing function selection (F8-42) is valid, after
Timing operation
30 the inverter current running time reaches the set time,
complete output
ON signal is output.
If AI1 input is higher than F8-46 (AI1 input protection
AI1 input exceeding
31 upper limit) or lower than F8-45 (AI1 input protection
limit
lower limit), ON signal is output.
If the inverter is in the load becoming 0 state, ON
32 Load becoming 0
signal is output.
If the inverter is in the reverse running state, ON
33 Reverse running
signal is output.
34 Zero current state Refer to description of F8-28 and F8-29.
The inverter module heat sinking temperature (F7-07)
Module temperature
35 reaches the set module temperature reaching value
reaching
(F8-47), ON signal is output.
Software current Refer to description of F8-36 and F8-37.
36
exceeding limit
Frequency lower limit If the running frequency reaches the lower limit, ON
37 reaching (having output signal is output. In the state of stop, the signal is still
in the state of stop) ON.
If a fault occurs to the inverter and the inverter
38 Alarm output
continues to run, the inverter outputs an alarm.
If the motor temperature reaches F9-58 (motor
Motor overheated
39 overheated alarm threshold), ON signal is output. You
alarm
can query the motor temperature via U0-34.
Current running time The inverter current running time exceeds the value
40
reaching set in F8-53, ON signal is output.
Function Code Name Default

F5-06 FMP function selection 0
F5-07 AO1 function selection 0
F5-08 AO2 function selection 1
The range of pulse output via FMP terminal is 0.01kHz to F5-09 (maximum FMP output
frequency). F5-09 ranges from 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz.
The AO1 and AO2 output rang is 0V-10V or 0mA-20mA. The relationship between pulse
or analog output range and corresponding function is as below:
Function Corresponding to Pulse or

Value Function
Analog Output range 0.0%-100.0%
0 Running frequency 0- maximum output frequency
1 Set frequency 0-maximum output frequency
145

2 Output current 0-2 times of motor rated current

3 Output torque (absolute value) 0-2 times of motor rated torque
4 Output power 0-2 times of rated power
5 Output voltage 0-1.2 times of inverter rated voltage
6 Pulse input 0.01kHz-100.00kHz
7 AI1 0V-10V
8 AI2 0V-10V (or 0-20mA)
9 AI3 0V-10V
10 Length 0-maximum set length
11 Counting value 0-maximum counting value
12 Communication setting 0.0%-100.0%
0-rotating speed corresponding to
13 Motor rotating speed
maximum output frequency
14 Output current 0.0A-1000.0A
15 Output voltage 0.0V-1000.0V
-2 times of motor rated torque to 2 times
16 Output torque (actual value)
of motor rated torque

Maximum FMP output 0.01kHz-100.00kHz 50.00kHz
F5-09
frequency)
If FM terminal is used for pulse output, this parameter is used to set the maximum
frequency of pulse output.

F5-10 AO1 offset coefficient -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
F5-11 AO1 gain -10.00 to 10.00 1.00
F5-12 AO2 offset coefficient -100.0% to 100.0% 0.00%
F5-13 AO2 gain -10.00 to 10.00 1.00
These parameters are used to correct the zero drift of the analog output and the output
amplitude deviation. It can also be used to define any desired AO curve.
If “b” represents zero offset, “k” represents gain, “Y” represents actual output, and “X”
represents standard output, the actual output is: Y=kX+b;
AO1 and AO2 zero offset coefficient 100% corresponds to 10V (or 20mA). Standard
output refers to 0 to maximum analog output corresponding to the output of 0V-10V
(0mA-20mA) with no zero offset or gain adjustment.
For example, If the analog output is the running frequency, it is expected to output 8V
when the frequency is 0, and output 3V at the maximum frequency, the gain shall be set to
-0.50, and the zero offset shall be set to 80%.

F5-17 FMR output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
146


F5-18 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
F5-19 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
F5-20 DO1 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
F5-21 DO2 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
These parameters are used to set the delay time of output terminals FMR, relay 1, relay 2,
DO1 and DO2 from status change to actual output

Name Default
Code
Unit’s digit FMR valid status selection 00000
0: positive logic
1: negative logic
Ten’s digit Relay 1 valid status selection
DO valid (0, 1, same as FMR)
F5-22 selection Hundred’s digit Relay 2 valid status selection l
mode (0, 1, same as FMR)
Thousand’s digit DO1 valid status selection
(0, 1, same as FMR)
Ten thousand’s DO2 valid status selection
digit (0, 1, same as FMR)
These parameters are used to set valid selected mode of output terminals FMR, relay 1,
relay 2, DO1 and DO2
 If positive logic is selected, the output terminal is valid when being connected with
COM. It is invalid when it breaks.
 If negative logic is selected, the output terminal is invalid when being connected with
COM. It is valid when it breaks.
Group F6: Start/Stop Control

0: Direct start 0
Startup
F6-00 1: Rotation speed tracking restart
mode
2: Pre-excited start (asynchronous motor)
 0: Direct start
− If the DC braking time is set to 0, inverter starts to run at the startup frequency.
− If the DC braking time is not 0, the inverter performs DC braking first and then
starts to run at startup frequency. It is applicable to small-inertia load application
where the motor is likely to rotate at startup.
 1: Rotation speed tracking restart
The inverter judges the rotation speed and director of the motor first and then starts at
147

the tracked frequency. The rotating motor will be started smoothly without surge. It is
applicable to the restart upon instantaneous power failure of large-inertia loads. To
ensure the performance of rotation speed tracking restart, set the motor parameters
in group F1 properly.
 2: Pre-excited start (asynchronous motor)
It is only valid for asynchronous motor and used for building magnetic field before the
motor runs. For pre-excited current and pre-excited time, refer to parameters F6-05
and F6-06.
− If the pre-excited time is 0, the inverter cancels pre-excitation and starts to run at
startup frequency.
− If the pre-excited time is not 0, the inverter pre-excites first before startup so as to
improve the dynamic response of the motor.

0: From stop frequency 0
Rotation speed
F6-01 1: From zero speed
tracking mode
2: From maximum frequency
To complete the rotation speed tracking process within the shortest time, select the proper
mode of inverter tracking motor rotation speed:
 0: Track from the frequency upon power failure.
It is the commonly selected mode.
 1: Track from zero frequency.
It is applicable to power failure for long.
 2: Track from the maximum frequency.
It is applicable to the power-generating load.

Rotation speed 1-100 20
F6-02
tracking speed
In the rotation speed tracking restart mode, select the rotation speed tracking rate. Bigger
this parameter is, faster the tracking is. But too big value may cause unreliable tracking.

F6-03 Startup frequency 0.00Hz-10.00Hz 0.00Hz
Startup frequency 0.0s-100.0s 0.0s
F6-04
holding time
To ensure the motor torque at inverter startup, set proper startup frequency. In addition, to
build excitation when the motor starts up, the startup frequency holding time needs to be
enabled.
148

The startup frequency (F6-03) is not restricted by the frequency lower limit. But if the set
target frequency is lower than the startup frequency, the inverter will not start up and stays
in the standby state.
When the forward rotation and reverse rotation is being switched over, the startup
frequency holding time is disabled. The holding time is not included in the acceleration
time but in the running time of simple PLC.
Example 1:
F0-03=0 Frequency source is digital setting
F0-08=2.00Hz The frequency is 2.00Hz via digital setting.
F6-03=5.00Hz The startup frequency is 5.00Hz.
F6-04=2.0s Startup frequency holding time is 2.0s
In this example, the inverter is in the standby state and the output frequency is 0.00Hz.
Example 2
F0-03=0 Frequency source is digital setting
F0-08=10.00Hz The frequency is 10.00Hz via digital setting.
F6-03=5.00Hz The startup frequency is 5.00Hz.
F6-04=2.0s Startup frequency holding time is 2.0s
In this example, the inverter accelerates to 5.00Hz. After 2.0s, it accelerates to set
frequency 10.00Hz.

Starting DC braking current 0%-100% 0%
F6-05
/Pre-excited current
Starting DC braking time 0.0s-100.0s 0.0s
F6-06
/Pre-excited time
Starting DC braking is generally used to restart the motor that was just stopped during
running. Pre-excitation is used to make the asynchronous motor build magnetic field
before startup so as to improve the responsiveness.
Starting DC braking is only valid for direct start. In this case, the inverter performs DC
braking at set starting DC braking current. After the starting DC braking time, the inverter
starts to run. If the DC braking time is 0, the inverter starts up directly without DC braking.
Bigger the DC braking current is, bigger the braking force is.
If the startup mode is pre-excited start, the inverter builds magnetic field based on the set
pre-excited current. After the pre-excited time, the inverter starts to run. If the pre-excited
time is 0, the inverter starts up directly without pre-excitation.
The starting DC braking current or pre-excited current is percentage relative to the inverter
rated current.

Acceleration/ 0: Linear acceleration/deceleration 0
F6-07
Deceleration 1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
149


mode 2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
It is used to select the frequency change mode during the inverter start and stop process.
 0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases along linear. MD380 provides four
types of acceleration/deceleration time. You can make selection from F4-00 to F4-08.
 1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
The output frequency increases or decreases along the S curve. S curve is generally
used in the applications where start and stop processes are relatively flat, such as
elevator and conveyor belt. F6-08 and F6-09 define the time proportion of the start
segment and end segment of S-curve acceleration/deceleration, respectively.
 1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
In S-curve acceleration/deceleration B, the motor rated frequency is all along the

curve inflexion point. It is usually used in applications with speed higher than rated
frequency requiring acceleration/deceleration.
When the speed is higher than rated frequency, the acceleration/deceleration time is:
In the formula, f is the set frequency, is motor rated frequency and T is the
time requiring to accelerate from 0Hz to .

Time proportion of S-curve 0.0%-(100.0%-F6-09) 30.0%
F6-08
start segment
Time proportion of S-curve end 0.0%-(100.0%-F6-08) 30.0%
F6-09
segment
F6-08 and F6-09 define the time proportion of the start segment and end segment of
S-curve acceleration/deceleration, respectively. They must satisfy the requirement: F6-08
+ F6-09 ≤ 100.0%.
In the first figure (S-curve acceleration/deceleration A), t1 is defined by F6-08, within

which the output frequency change slope increases gradually. And t2 is the time defined
in F6-09, within which the slope of the output frequency change gradually decreases to 0.
Within the time between t1 and t2, the slope of the output frequency change remains
fixed.
150


0: Decelerate to stop 0
F6-10 Stop mode
1: Coast to stop
 0: Decelerate to stop
After the stop command is enabled, the inverter reduces the output frequency
according to the deceleration time and will stop after the frequency declines to zero.
 1: Coast to stop
After the stop command is enabled, the inverter immediately stops output. The load
will coast to stop according to the mechanical inertia.

DC braking starting frequency 0.00Hz-Maximun 0.00Hz
F6-11
at stop frequency
F6-12 DC braking waiting time at stop 0.0s-36.0s 0.0s
F6-13 DC braking current at stop 0%-100% 0%
F6-14 DC braking time at stop 0.0s-36.0s 0.0s
 DC braking starting frequency at stop
During the process of decelerating to stop, when the running frequency is lower than
the value set in F6-11, the inverter starts DC braking.
 DC braking waiting time at stop
When the running frequency declines to the stop DC braking starting frequency, the
inverter stops output for some time and then starts DC braking so as to avoid faults
like over-current caused when the inverter starts DC braking at high speed.
 DC braking current at stop
It indicates the output current at DC braking and is percentage of the motor rated
current. Bigger the value in F6-13 is, better DC braking result will be obtained, and
meanwhile more overheated the inverter and motor will be.
151

 DC braking time at stop
It indicates the holding time of DC braking. If it is set to 0, DC braking is cancelled.
The DC braking process at stop is shown as below:

F6-15 Brake use ratio 0%-100% 100%
It is valid for the inverter with internal braking unit and used for adjust the duty ratio of the
braking unit. Higher F6-15 is, better braking result will be obtained. But during the braking
process, the inverter bus voltage fluctuates greatly.
Group F7: Operation Panel and Display

0: MF.K key invalid 0
1: Switchover between operation
panel and remote command
MF.K Key function channel (terminal or communication)
F7-01
selection 2: Switchover between forward
rotation and reverse rotation
3: Forward JOG
4: Reverse JOG
MF.K key refers to multifunctional key. You can set the function of MF.K key via this
parameter. You can perform switchover via this key both in the stop and running process.
 0: MF.K key invalid

152

 1: Switchover between operation panel and

remote command channel (terminal or communication)
It indicates switchover from the current command source to the operation panel
control (local operation). If the current command source is operation panel control,
this key is invalid.
 2: Switchover between forward rotation and

reverse rotation
You can witch the direction of the frequency command via the MF.K key. It is only
valid when the current command source is operation panel.
 3: Forward JOG
You can realize forward JOG (FJOG) via the MF.K key.
 4: Reverse JOG
You can realize reverse JOG (FJOG) via the MF.K key.

0: STOP/RESET key valid only in 1
STOP/RESET key operation panel mode
F7-02
function 1: STOP/RESET key valid only in
any operation mode
Function
Name Default Setting Range
code
0000-FFFF
LED displaying
F7-03 running 1F
parameters 1
If the parameters here need to be displayed during the
153

operation, set the corresponding positions to 1, and set

F7-03 to decimal equivalent of this binary number.
1-65535
LED displaying
F7-04 running 255
parameters 2

These two parameters are used to set the parameters that can be queried when the
inverter is in the running status. You can query up to 32 running status parameters and the
display starts from the lowest bit of F7-03.
Function
Name Default Setting Range
code
0000-FFFF
LED displaying
F7-05 stop 1F
parameters
154


F7-06 Load speed display coefficient 0.0001-6.5000 1.0000
The output frequency of the inverter and the load speed are relative through this
parameter. It is set when the load speed needs to be displayed.

Heat sink temperature of 0.0℃-100.0℃ 0℃
F7-07
inverter module
It is used to display the temperature of inverter module IGBT, and the overheated
protection value of the inverter module IGBT depends on the model.

Heat sink temperature of 0.0℃-100.0℃ 0℃
F7-08
rectifier module
It is used to display the temperature of rectifier module, and the overheated protection
value of the rectifier module depends on the model.
F7-09 Accumulative running time 0h-65535h 0h
It is used to display the inverter accumulative running time. Once the running time reaches
the value set in F8-17, the ON signal via is output via the digital output function (12).
F7-10 Product number Inverter product number
Software version number of

F7-11 Soft version number
control board
0: 0 decimal place 0
The number of decimal
F7-12 1: 1 decimal place
places of load speed display
2: 2 decimal places
155


3: 3 decimal places
F7-12 is used to display the number of the number of decimal places of load speed. Here
gives an example to explain how to calculate the load speed:
Suppose that F7-06 (Load speed display coefficient) is 2.000 and F7-12 is 2 (2 decimal
places). When the inverter running frequency is 40.00Hz, the load speed is 40.00*2.000 =
80.00 (display of 2 decimal places).
If the inverter is in the stop state, the load speed is the speed corresponding to the set
frequency, namely, “set load speed”. If the set frequency is 50.00Hz, the load speed in the
stop state is 50.00*2.000 = 100.00 (display of 2 decimal places).
F7-13 Accumulative power-on time 0h-65535h 0h
It is used to display the accumulative power-on time of the inverter since the delivery. If
the time reaches the set power-on time (F8-17), the ON signal is output via the digital
output function (24).
F7-14 Accumulative power consumption 0-65535KWH
It is used to display the accumulative power consumption of the inverter until now.
Group F8: Auxiliary Functions

F8-00 JOG running frequency 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 2.00Hz
F8-01 JOG acceleration time 0.0s-6500.0s 20.0s
F8-02 JOG deceleration time 0.0s-6500.0s 20.0s
It is used to define the set frequency and acceleration/deceleration time of the inverter
when jogging. The startup mode is direct start (F6-00=0) and the stop mode is decelerate
to stop (F6-10=0).

F8-03 Acceleration time 2 0.0s-6500.0s 20.0s
F8-04 Deceleration time 2 0.0s-6500.0s 20.0s
MD380 provides a total of 4 groups of acceleration/deceleration time, which are defined

the same. You can select/switch over the 4 groups of acceleration/deceleration time via
different combinations of DIs. Please refer to F4-01 to F4-05 for more details.
156


F8-09 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz
F8-10 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz
F8-11 Frequency jump amplitude 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz
If the set frequency is within the frequency jump area, the actual running frequency will be
close to the set frequency in the jump area. The setting of jump frequency helps to avoid
the mechanical resonance point of the load.
MD380 can set two jump frequencies. If they are set to 0, the frequency jump function is
cancelled. The principle of the frequency jump and jump amplitude is shown as below:

F8-12 Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time 0.0s-3000.0s 0.0s
It is used to set the time when the output is 0Hz at transition of the inverter forward and
reverse rotation, shown as below:

0: Enabled 0
F8-13 Reverse control
1: Disabled
It is used to set whether to allow the inverter to rotate in reverse position. In the
157

applications where reverse rotation is prohibited, set F8-13 to 1.

0: Run at frequency lower 0
Running mode when
limit
F8-14 set frequency below
1: Stop
frequency lower limit
2: Run at zero speed
It is used to set the inverter running mode when the set frequency is below the frequency
lower limit. MD380 provides three running modes to satisfy requirements of various
applications.

F8-15 Droop control 0.00Hz-10.00Hz 0.00Hz
Generally, it is used for balancing the load when using multi-motors. The inverter output
frequency decreases as the load increases. Thus the output frequency of motors with load
declines more, reducing the workload of the motor.

F8-16 Set accumulative power-on time 0h-65000h 0h
If accumulative power-on time (F7-13) hits the value set in F8-16, the ON signal is output.
For example, combining virtual DI/DO function, the inverter shall be realized to report an
alarm when the set accumulative power-on time is set to 100.
The solution is as follows:
1. Set virtual DI1 to user defined error 1: A1-00=44.
2. Set virtual DI1 to from virtual DO1: A1-05=0000.
3. Set DO1 to power-on time reaching: A1-11=24.
4. Set the set accumulative power-on time to 100: F8-16=100.
Then if the accumulative power-on time reaches 100h, the inverter reports Err24.

F8-17 Set accumulative running time 0h-65000h 0h
It is used to set the inverter’s set accumulative running time. If the Accumulative running
time (F7-09) reaches the value set in F8-16, the ON signal is outputs via DO terminal.

0: No protection 0
F8-18 Startup protection selection
1: protection
It involves the inverter’s safety protection function. If it is set to 1, it has two roles: first, if
the running command exists upon inverter power-on, it must cancel the running command
to remove the running protection status.
158

Second, if the running command exists upon inverter fault reset, it must cancel the
running command to remove the running protection status.
In this way, the motor can be protected from responding to running command upon
power-on or fault reset in unexpected conditions.

Frequency detection 0.00Hz-Maximum 50.00Hz
F8-19
value (FDT1) frequency
Frequency detection 0.0%-100.0% (FDT1 5.0%
F8-20 hysteresis (FDT hysteresis level)
1)
If the running frequency is higher than the frequency detection value, the ON signal is
output via DO. If the running frequency is lower than the detection value, output of the ON
signal is cancelled.
It is used to set the detection value of output frequency and hysteresis value upon
removing of the output. F8-20 is percentage of the hysteresis frequency to the frequency
detection value (F8-19).
The FDT function is shown as below:

0.00-100% 0.0%
Frequency reaching
F8-21 (maximum
detection amplitude
frequency)
If the inverter running frequency is within the target frequency area, the ON signal is
output via the DO.
This parameter is used to set the frequency reaching detection amplitude. It is the
percentage relative to maximum frequency. The output frequency reaches the detection
amplitude, shown as below:
159


Jump frequency during 0: Disabled 0
F8-22
acceleration/deceleration 1: Enabled
It is used to set whether jump frequency during acceleration/deceleration is effective.
In the condition that jump frequency during acceleration/deceleration is enabled, when the
running frequency is in the frequency jump area, the actual running frequency will jump
over the set frequency jump amplitude. The jump frequency during
acceleration/deceleration enabled is shown as below:

Frequency point at switchover 0.00Hz-Maximu 0.00Hz
F8-25 between acceleration time 1 and m frequency
acceleration time 2
Frequency point at switchover 0.00Hz-Maximu 0.00Hz
F8-26 between deceleration time 1 and m frequency
deceleration time 2
This function is valid when the motor selection is motor 1 and acceleration/deceleration
time switchover is not performed via DI terminal. It is used to select different
160

acceleration/deceleration time via running frequency range rather than DI terminal during
the running process of the inverter.
The acceleration/deceleration time switchover via running frequency range is shown as

below:
Ac
ce
tim lera
e tio
1 n
In the figure above, during acceleration, if the running frequency is higher than F8-25,
select acceleration time 2. If the running frequency is lower than F8-25, select
acceleration time 1.
During deceleration, if the running frequency is higher than F8-26, select deceleration
time 1. If the running frequency is lower than F8-26, select deceleration time 2.

0: Disabled 0
F8-27 Terminal JOG preferred
1: Enabled
It is used to set whether terminal JOG is preferred.
In the condition that terminal JOG is preferred, if there is terminal JOG command during
the running process of the inverter, the inverter switches to terminal JOG running status.

Frequency detection 0.00Hz-Maximu 50.00Hz
F8-28
value (FDT2) m frequency
Frequency detection hysteresis 0.0%-100.0% 5.0%
F8-29
(FDT hysteresis 2) (FDT2 level)
The frequency detection function is the same as FDT1 function. For details, refer to
description of F8-19 and F8-20.

Any frequency reaching 0.00Hz-Maximum 50.00H
F8-30
detection value 1 frequency z
0.0%-100.0% 0.0%
Any frequency reaching detection
F8-31 (Maximum
amplitude 1
frequency)
F8-32 Any frequency reaching 0.00Hz-Maximum 50.00H
161


detection value 2 frequency z
0.0%-100.0% 0.0%
Any frequency reaching detection
F8-33 (Maximum
amplitude 2
frequency)
If the output frequency of the inverter is in the amplitudes of any frequency reaching
detection value, the ON signal is output via DO.
MD380 provides two groups of any frequency reaching detection parameters. These
parameters are used to set the frequency detection value and detection amplitude, shown
as below:

0.0%-300.0% 5.0%
F8-34 Zero current detection level (Motor rated
current)
Zero current detection delay 0.00s-600.00s 0.10s
F8-35
time
If the inverter’s output current equals or is less than the zero current detection level and
the duration exceeds the zero current detection delay time, the ON signal is output via DO.
The zero current detection is shown as below:

Output current exceeding limit 0.0% (no detection) 200.0%
F8-36
value 0.1%-300.0%
162


(Motor rated
current)
Output current exceeding limit 0.00s-600.00s 0.00s
F8-37
detection delay time
If the inverter’s output current is equal to or higher than the output current exceeding limit
value and the duration exceeds the output current exceeding limit detection delay time,
the ON signal is output via DO. The output current exceeding limit function is shown as
below:

0.0%-300.0% 100.0%
F8-38 Any current reaching 1 (Motor rated
current)
0.0%-300.0% 0.0%
Any current reaching 1
F8-39 (Motor rated
amplitude
current)
0.0%-300.0% 100.0%
F8-40 Any current reaching 2 (Motor rated
current)
0.0%-300.0% 0.0%
Any current reaching 2
F8-41 (Motor rated
amplitude
current)
If the output current of the inverter is in the amplitudes of any current reaching detection
value, the ON signal is output via DO.
MD380 provides two groups of any current reaching detection parameters. These
parameters are used to set the current detection value and detection amplitudes, shown
as below:
163


0: Disabled 0
F8-42 Timing function selection
1: Enabled
0: F8-44 0
Timing operation time 1: AI1
F8-43
selection 2: AI2
3: AI3
F8-44 Timing operation time 0.0Min-6500.0Min 0.0Min
These parameters are used to complete the inverter timing operation function.
If F8-42 is set to 1, the inverter starts to time at startup. When the set timing operation time
is up, the inverter stops automatically and meanwhile the ON signal is output.
The inverter starts timing from 0 each time it starts up and the remaining timing operation
time can be queried via U0-20.
The timing operation time is set via F8-43 and F8-44. The unit is minute.

AI1 input voltage protection 0.00V-F8-46 3.10V
F8-45
value lower limit
AI1 input voltage protection F8-45-10.00V 6.80V
F8-46
value upper limit
These two parameters are used to indicate whether the AI1 input voltage is in the set
range. When the AI1 input is higher than F8-46 or lower than F8-45, the “AI1 input
exceeding limit” ON signal is output via DO.

F8-47 Module temperature reaching 0.00V-F8-46 75℃
When the inverter heatsink temperature hits the value set in F8-47, the “module
temperature reaching” ON signal is output via DO.

0: Fan works during
F8-48 Cooling fan control running 0
1: Fan works all along
164

It is used to select the working mode of the cooling fan. If F8-48 is set to 0, the fan works
in the inverter running status. But in the inverter stop status, if the heaksink temperature is
higher than 40℃, the cooling fan works. If the heatsink temperature is lower than 40℃,
the cooling fan does not work.
If F8-48 is set to 1, the cooling fan works all along after power-on.

Sleep frequency
F8-49 Wakeup frequency (F8-51)-Maximum frequency 0.00Hz
(F0-10)
F8-50 Wakeup delay time 0.0s-6500.0s 0.0s
0.00Hz-Wakeup frequency
F8-51 Sleep frequency 0.00Hz
(F8-49)
F8-52 Sleep delay time 0.0s-6500.0s 0.0s
These parameters are used to realize the sleep and wakeup function in the water supply
application.
During the inverter running process, if the set frequency equals or is lower than the sleep
frequency (F8-51), after the sleep delay time (F8-52), the inverters enters sleep state and
stops automatically.
In the inverter sleep state, if the current running command is effective and the set
frequency is higher than or equals the wakeup frequency (F8-49), after th4e wakeup delay
time (F8-50), the inverters starts up.
Generally, please set the wakeup frequency higher than or equal to the sleep frequency. If
the wakeup frequency and sleep frequency are set to 0, the sleep and wakeup function is
disabled.
When enabling the sleep function, if the frequency source is PID, whether PID operation is
performed in the sleep state is influenced by FA-28. In this case, select PID operation
enabled in the stop state (FA-28=1).

F8-53 Current running time reaching 0.0Min-6500.0Min 0.0Min
If the current running time reaches the value set in F8-53, the “Current running time
reaching” ON signal is output via DO.
Group F9: Fault and Protection

Motor overload protection 0: Disabled
F9-00 1
F9-01 Motor overload protection gain 0.20-10.00 1.00
 F9-00=0: No motor overload protective function.
The motor may be damaged due to overheat. A thermal relay is suggested to be

165

installed between the inverter and the motor.
 F9-00=1
The inverter judges whether the motor is overloaded according to the inverse time-lag
curve of the motor overload protection.
The inverse time-lag curve of the motor overload protection is 220%×(F9-01)×motor

rated current (if the curve remains for one minute, the inverter reports motor overload
error), or 150%×(F9-01)×motor rated current (if the curve remains for 60 minutes, the
inverter reports motor overload error).
The user needs to set F9-01 properly based on the actual overload capacity. Too big
setting of F9-01 may cause damage to the motor due to overheat but the inverter
does not alarm.

F9-02 Motor overload pre-alarm coefficient 50%-100% 80%
This function is applied to give a pre-alarm signal to the control system via DO before the
motor overload error. This parameter is used to determine the time advance before the
motor overload protection. Bigger the motor overload pre-alarm coefficient is, smaller the
time advance will be.
When the accumulative value of inverter output current is higher than the overload inverse
time-lag curve×F9-02, the inverter outputs the “motor overload pre-alarm” ON signal.

F9-03 Over-voltage stall gain 0 (no stall overvoltage)-100 0
F9-04 Over-voltage stall protective voltage 120%-150% 130%
During deceleration of the inverter, when the DC bus voltage exceeds the over-voltage
stall protective voltage, the inverter stops deceleration and keeps the current running
frequency. After the bus voltage declines, the inverter continues to decelerate.
F9-03 is used to adjust the inverter’s capacity in suppressing the over-voltage. Bigger it is,
bigger suppressing capacity is obtained. In the prerequisite of no occurrence of
over-voltage, set the over-voltage stall gain to a small value.
For small-inertia load, the value should be small. Otherwise, the dynamic response of the
system will be slow. For large-inertia load, the value should be large. Otherwise, the
suppressing result will be poor and overvoltage fault may occur.
If the over-voltage stall gain is set to 0, the over-voltage stall function is disabled. The
over-voltage stall protective voltage setting 100% corresponds to the following base
values:
Corresponding Base
Voltage Class
Value
Single-phase 220V 290V
Three-phase 220V 290V
166


Three-phase
1380V
1140V
F9-05 Over-current stall gain 0-100 20
F9-06 Over-current stall protective current 100%-200% 150%
During acceleration/deceleration of the inverter, when the output current exceeds the
over-current stall protective current, the inverter stops deceleration and keeps the current
running frequency. After the output current declines, the inverter continues to
accelerate/decelerate.
F9-05 is used to adjust the inverter’s capacity in suppressing the over-current. Bigger it is,
bigger suppressing capacity is obtained. In the prerequisite of no occurrence of
over-current, set the over-current stall gain to a small value.
For small-inertia load, the value should be small. Otherwise, the dynamic response of the
system will be slow. For large-inertia load, the value should be large. Otherwise, the
suppressing result will be poor and over-current fault may occur.
If the over-current stall gain is set to 0, the over-voltage stall function is disabled.

Selection of short-circuit to earth 0: Disabled
F9-07 1
protection upon power-on 1: Enabled
It is used to determine whether to check the motor short-circuit to earth upon power-on of
the inverter. If it is enabled, the inverter UVW will have voltage output during some time
after power-on.

F9-09 Fault auto reset times 0-20 0
If fault auto reset function is selected, this parameter is used to set the times of fault auto
reset. If the times are exceeded, the inverter will keep the fault status.

Fault DO action selection during 0: No action
F9-10 1
fault auto reset 1: Action
If fault auto reset function is selected, this parameter is used to set whether the fault DO
acts during the fault auto reset.

F9-11 Fault auto reset time interval 0.1s-100.0s 1.0s
It is used to set the time since the inverter alarm to fault auto reset.
167


Input phase missing Unit’s digit: Input phase missing protection
protection and Ten’s digit: Contactor pick-up protection
F9-12 11
contactor pick-up 0: Disabled
It is to determine whether to protect input phase missing and contactor pickup
The models of MD380 that provide input phase missing and contactor pick-up protection
are as follows:
Models Providing Input Phase Missing

Voltage Class
and Contactor Pick-up Protection
Single-phase 220V None
Three-phase 220V 11KW G model
Three-phase 380V 18.5KW G model
Three-phase 690V 18.5KW G model
Three-phase 1140V All
For every voltage class, the MD380 inverters of initial power and above have the function
of input phase missing protection and contactor pick-up protection. The MD380 inverters
of the initial power below have no such function no matter whether F9-12 is set to 0 or 1.

0: Disabled
F9-13 Output phase missing protection selection 1
1: Enabled
It is to determine whether to protect output phase missing
Function Code Name Setting Range

F9-14 1st fault type
F9-15 2nd fault type 0-99
rd
F9-16 3 (latest) fault type
It is used to record the types of the recent three faults of the inverter for the most recent
three times: 0 indicates no fault, while 1 to 99 indicates ERR01 to ERR99.
Function Code Name Description

rd
F9-17 Frequency upon 3 fault Frequency at occurrence of the latest fault
rd
F9-18 Current upon 3 fault Current at occurrence of the latest fault
rd
F9-19 Bus voltage upon 3 fault Bus voltage at occurrence of the latest fault
It is a decimal number and displays the status of all
DI terminals at occurrence of the latest fault.
The sequence is as follows:
rd
F9-20 DI status upon 3 fault
If the DI is ON, the setting is 1. If the DI is OFF, the
168

setting is 0. The equivalent decimal number

converted from the DI statuses will be displayed.
It is a decimal number and displays the status of all
output terminals at occurrence of the latest fault.
The sequence is as follows:

F9-21
upon 3rd fault
If the output terminal is ON, the setting is 1. If the
output terminal is OFF, the setting is 0. The
equivalent decimal number converted from the DI
statuses will be displayed.
rd
Inverter status upon 3
F9-22 Reserved
fault
rd
Power-on time upon 3 The current power-on time at occurrence of the
F9-23
fault latest fault
rd
Running time upon 3 The current running time at occurrence of the latest
F9-24
fault fault
nd
F9-27 Frequency upon 2 fault
nd
F9-28 Current upon 2 fault
F9-29 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault
F9-30 DI status upon 2nd fault
Output terminal status Same as F9-17-F9-24.
F9-31 nd
upon 2 fault
F9-32 Frequency upon 2nd fault
F9-33 Current upon 2nd fault
F9-34 Bus voltage upon 2nd fault
F9-37 DI status upon 1st fault
F9-38
upon 1st fault
F9-39 Frequency upon 1st fault
F9-40 Current upon 1st fault
Same as F9-17-F9-24.
F9-41 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault
F9-42 DI status upon 1st fault
F9-43
upon 1st fault
F9-44 Frequency upon 1st fault
Fault protection
F9-47 00000
action selection 1 Unit’s digit: motor overload (Err11)
0: Coast to stop
1: Stop according
169 to the stop mode

2: Continue to run
Ten’s digit: input phase missing (Err12)
Same as unit’s digit
Hundred’s digit: output phase missing (Err13)
Thousand’s digit: external fault (Err15)
Ten thousand’s digit: communication abnormal
(Err16)
Unit’s digit: encoder error (Err20)
0: Coast to stop
1: Switch over to V/F control, stop according to
the stop mode
2: Switch over to V/F control, continue to run
Ten’s digit: parameter read-out and write-in
Fault protection abnormal (Err21)
F9-48 00000
action selection 2 0: Coast to stop
Hundred’s digit: reserved
Thousand’s digit: motor overheated (Err25)
Same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Ten thousand’s digit: Running time reaching
Unit’s digit: user defined error 1 (Err27)
Ten’s digit: user defined error 2 (Err28)
Hundred’s digit: power-on time reaching (Err29)
Thousand’s digit: Load becoming 0 (Err30)
Fault protection
F9-49 0: Coast to stop 00000
action selection 3
2: Continue to run at 7% of motor rated
frequency and resume to the set frequency if the
load recovers.
Ten thousand’s digit: PID feedback lost during
running (Err31)
Fault protection Unit’s digit: too big speed deviation (Err42)
F9-50 00000
action selection 4 Same a unit’s digit in F9-47
Ten’s digit: motor over-speed (Err43)
170

Hundred’s digit: initial position error (Err51)

Thousand’s digit: speed feedback error (Err52)
Ten thousand’s digit: Reserved
 If “Coast to stop” is selected, the inverter displays Err** and directly stops.
 If “Stop according to the stop mode” is selected, the inverter displays A** and stops
according to the stop mode. After stop, the inverter displays Err**.
 If “Continue to run” is selected, the inverter continues to run and displays A**. The
running frequency is set in F9-54.

0: Current running frequency
Frequency selection 1: Set frequency
F9-54 for continuing to run 2: Frequency upper limit 0
upon fault 3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency upon abnormality
Backup frequency
F9-55 0.0%-100.0% (maximum frequency) 100.0%
upon abnormality
If fault occurs during the running and the troubleshooting setting is “continue to run”, the
inverter displays A** and continues to run at the frequency set in F9-54.
The setting of F9-55 is percentage relative to maximum frequency.

0: No temperature sensor
F9-56 Motor temperature sensor type 1: PT100 1
2: PT1000
F9-57 Motor overheated protection threshold 0℃-200℃ 110℃
F9-58 Motor overheated pre-alarm threshold 0℃-200℃ 90℃
The signal of the motor temperature sensor needs to be connected to the optional I/O
extension card. AI3 of the extension card can be used for the temperature signal input.
The motor temperature sensor is connected to AI3 and PGND of the extension card. The
AI3 terminal of MD380 supports both PT100 and PT1000. Please set the sensor type
properly during the use. You can query the motor temperature via U0-34.
If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in F9-57, the inverter alarms and acts
according to the selected fault protection mode.
If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in F9-58, the “motor overheated pre-alarm”
ON signal is output via DO.

F9-59 Instantaneous power failure action 0: Invalid 0
171

selection 1: Decelerate
Instantaneous power failure action
F9-60 80.0%-100.0% 90.0%
pausing judging voltage
Instantaneous power failure voltage
F9-61 0.00s-100.00s 0.50s
rally judging time
Instantaneous power failure action 60.0%-100.0% ( standard
F9-62 80.0%
judging voltage bus voltage)
Upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the inverter’s DC bus voltages
falls. This function enables the inverter to compensate the DC bus voltage reduction with
the load feedback energy by lowering the output frequency so as to make the inverter
continue running.
If F9-59=1, upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the inverter
decelerates. Once the bus voltage resumes to normal, the inverter accelerates to the set
frequency. If the bus voltage is normal and the lasting time exceeds the value set in F9-61,
it indicates the bus voltage resumes to normal.
If F9-59=1, upon instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the inverter
decelerates to stop.

0: Disabled
F9-63 Load becoming 0 protection selection 0
1: Enabled
172

0.0%-100.0% (motor
F9-64 Load becoming 0 detection level 10.0%
rated current)
F9-65 Load becoming 0 detection time 0.0s-60.0s 1.0s
If the load becoming 0 protection is enabled, when the inverter output current is lower than
the detection level (F9-64) and the lasting time exceeds the detection time (F9-65), the
inverter output frequency automatically declines to 7% of the rated frequency. During the
load becoming 0 protection, if the load resumes to normal, the inverter automatically
accelerates to the set frequency.

F9-67 Over-speed detection value 0.0%-50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0%
F9-68 Over-speed detection time 0.0s-60.0s 1.0s
This function is only valid when the inverter runs in the speed sensor vector control mode.
If the inverter detects that the actual motor rotating speed exceeds maximum frequency
and the exceeding value is higher than the value in F9-67 and the lasting time exceeds
the value in F9-68, the inverter reports Err43 and acts based on the fault protection action
selection.
If the over-speed detection time is 0.0s, the over-speed detection function is cancelled.

F9-69 0.0%-50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0%
detection value
F9-70 0.0s-60.0s 5.0s
detection time
This function is only valid when the inverter runs in the speed sensor vector control mode.
If the inverter detects that there is big deviation of the actual motor rotating speed and set
frequency, the deviation value is higher than the value in F9-69 and the lasting time
exceeds the value in F9-70, the inverter reports Err42 and acts based on the fault
protection action selection.
If the too big speed deviation detection time is 0.0s, the too big speed deviation detection
function is cancelled.
Group FA: Process Control PID Function
PID control is a general method of process control. It adjusts the output frequency through
proportional, integral and differential calculations of the difference between the feedback
signal and the target signal and constitutes a feedback system so as to stabilize the
controlled value at the target value.
It is applicable to such process controls as flow control, pressure control and temperature
control. The basic principle framework of control is shown as follows:
173


0: FA-01
1: AI1
2: AI2
FA-00 PID setting source 3: AI3 20.0%
6: Multi-command
FA-01 PID digital setting 0.0%-100.0% 50.0%
FA-00 is used to select the target setting channel of process PID. The PID setting is
relative value and ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%. As well, the PID feedback is relative value.
The PID has the purpose of making the PID setting and PID feedback the same.

0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: AI1-AI2
FA-02 PID feedback source 4: Pulse setting (DI5) 0
6: AI1+AI2
7: MAX(|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)
This parameter is used to select the feedback signal channel of process PID.
The PID feedback is relative value and ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%.
0: Forward action
FA-03 PID action direction 0
1: Reverse action
Forward action: When the feedback value falls below the PID setting, the inverter output
frequency rises. For example, the winding tension control requires forward PID action.
Reverse action: When the feedback value falls below the PID setting, the inverter output
frequency declines. For example, the unwinding tension control requires reverse PID
action.
174

This function is influenced by the DI function 35 “Reverse PID action direction”.

FA-04 PID setting feedback range 0-65535 1000
PID feedback range is a non-dimensional unit. It is used for PID setting display (U0-15)
and PID feedback display (U0-16).
Relative value 100% of PID setting feedback corresponds to FA-04. If FA-04 is set to 2000
and PID setting is 100.0%, the PID setting display (U0-15) is 2000.

FA-05 Proportional gain Kp1 0.0-100.0 20.0
FA-06 Integral time Ti1 0.01s-10.00s 2.00s
FA-07 Differential time Td1 0.00-10.000 0.000s
 Proportional gain Kp1
It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator. Higher the Kp1 is, bigger the
regulating intensity is. If it is set to 100, the deviation of PID feedback and PID setting
is 100% and the adjustment amplitude of the PID control on the output frequency
command is maximum frequency.
 Integration time Ti1
It decides the regulating intensity of integral adjustment. Shorter the integral time is,
bigger the regulating intensity is. When the deviation of PID feedback and PID setting
is 100%, the integral regulator performs continuous adjustment for the time set in
FA-06. Then the adjustment amplitude reaches maximum frequency.
 Differential time Td1
It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator on regulating the change rate of
deviation of PID feedback and PID setting. Longer the differential time is, bigger the
regulating intensity is. Differential time is the time within which if the feedback value
varies 100%, the adjustment amplitude reaches maximum frequency

FA-08 Cutoff frequency of PID reverse rotation 0.0-Maximum frequency 2.00Hz
In some situations, only when PID output frequency is negative value (inverter reverse
rotation), it is possible for PID to control the setting and feedback the same. But too high
reverse rotation frequency is prohibited in some applications. FA-08 is used to determine
the reverse rotation frequency upper limit.

FA-09 PID deviation limit 0.0%-100.0% 0.01%
If the deviation of PID feedback and PID setting is smaller than FA-09, PID stops control.
The small deviation of PID feedback and PID setting will make the output frequency
stabilize, effective for some closed-loop control applications.
175


FA-10 PID differential limit 0.00%-100.00% 0.10%
In PID control, the differential role is very sensitive and can cause system oscillation more
easily. Thus, the PID differential regulation is restricted to a small range. FA-10 is used to
set the PID differential output range.

FA-11 PID setting change time 0.00s-650.00s 0.00s
PID setting change time indicates the time required for PID setting changing from 0.0% to
100.0%. When the PID setting changes, the setting changes linearly according to the
change time, lowering the impact caused by sudden setting change on the system.

FA-12 PID feedback filter time 0.00s-60.00s 0.00s
FA-13 PID output filter time 0.00s-60.00s 0.00s
FA-12 is used to filter the PID feedback, helping to lower the interference on the feedback
but causing the reduction of the response of the process closed-loop system.
FA-13 is sued to filter the PID output frequency, helping to weaken sudden change of the
inverter output frequency but causing the reduction of the response of the process
closed-loop system.

FA-15 Proportional gain Kp2 0.0-100.0 20.0
FA-16 Integral time Ti2 0.01s-10.00s 2.00s
FA-17 Differential time Td2 0.000s-10.000s 0.000s
0: No switchover
PID parameters switchover 1: Switchover via terminal
FA-18 0
condition 2: Automatic switchover
based on deviation
FA-19 0.0% to FA-20 20.0%
deviation 1
FA-20 FA-19 to 100.0% 80.0%
deviation 2
In some applications, PID parameter switchover is required since one group of PID
parameters cannot satisfy the requirement of the whole running process.
These parameters are used for switchover of two groups of PID parameters. Regulator
parameters FA-15 to FA-17 have the same setting mode as FA-05 to FA-07.
The switchover can be realized either via DI terminal or according the deviation.
If you select switchover via DI terminal, the DI must be allocated with function 43 “PID
parameters switchover”. If the DI is invalid, group 1 (FA-05 to FA-07) is selected. If the DI
is valid, group 2 (FA-15 to FA-17) is selected.
176

If you select automatic switchover, when the absolute value of the deviation of feedback
and setting falls below FA-19, group 1 is selected. When the absolute value of the
deviation of feedback and setting is higher than FA-20, group 2 is selected. When the
deviation is between FA-19 and FA-20, the PID parameters are the corresponding linear
values of the two groups, shown as below:

FA-21 PID initial value 0.0%-100.0% 0.0%
FA-22 PID initial value holding time 0.00s-650.00s 0.00s
At startup of the inverter, PID output is fixed PID initial value (FA-21) and lasts the PID
initial value holding time. Then the PID starts closed-loop regulation. The function of the
PID initial value is shown as below:
Output
frequency
FA-22
FA-21
Time

Maximum deviation of two PID
FA-23 0.00%-100.00% 1.00%
outputs in forward direction
Maximum deviation of two PID
FA-24 0.00%-100.00% 1.00%
outputs in reverse direction
This function can limit the deviation of two PID outputs (2ms per PID output) so as to
suppress the rapid change of PID output to stabilize the running of the inverter.
FA-23 and FA-24 correspond to the maximum absolute value of the output deviation

Integral separated
PID integral
FA-25 Unit’s digit 0: Invalid 00
property
1: Valid
177

Whether to stop integral operation

when the output reaches the limit
Ten’s digit
0: Continue integral operation
1: Stop integral operation
In the condition that integral separated is set to valid, when the DI allocated with PID
integral pause (function 38) is enabled, the PID integral operation stops. This time only
proportional and differential operations take effect.
In the condition that integral separated is set to invalid, no matter whether the DI allocated
with PID integral pause (function 38) is enabled, the integral separated is invalid.
It is also used to select whether to stop the integral operation when the PID operation
output reaches the maximum or minimum value. If stopping integral operation is selected,
the PID integral operation stops, which may help to reduce the PID overshooting.

0.0%: Not judging feedback loss
FA-26 PID feedback loss detection value 0.0%
0.1%-100.0%
FA-27 PID feedback loss detection time 0.0s-20.0s 1.0s
They are used to judge whether PID feedback is lost.
If the PID feedback is lower than the value in FA-26 and the lasting time exceeds the value
in FA-27, the inverter reports Err31 and acts based on the selected fault protection mode.

0: No PID operation at stop
FA-28 Selection of PID operation at stop 0
1: PID operation at stop
It is used to select whether to continue PID operation in the state of stop. Generally, the
PID operation is stopped in the state of stop.
Group FB: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
The swing frequency function is applicable to the textile and chemical fiber fields and the
applications where traversing and winding functions are required.
The swing frequency function indicates that the output frequency of the inverter swings up
and down with the set frequency as the center. The trace of running frequency at the time
axis is shown as below:
The swing amplitude set by FB-00 and FB-01. When FB-01 is set to 1, the swing
amplitude is 0 and the swing frequency is disabled.
178


Swing frequency 0: Relative to the central frequency
FB-00 0
setting mode 1: Relative to maximum frequency
This parameter is used to select the benchmark quantity of the swing amplitude.
 0: Relative to the central frequency (F0-07 frequency source selection), and it is

variable swing amplitude system. The swing amplitude varies with the central
frequency (set frequency).
 1: Relative to the maximum frequency (F0-10 maximum output frequency), and it is

fixed swing amplitude system. The swing amplitude is fixed.

FB-01 Swing frequency amplitude 0.0%-100.0% 0.0%
FB-02 Kick frequency amplitude 0.0%-50.0% 0.0%
This parameter is used to determine the values of swing amplitude and kick frequency.
The swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.
 If relative to the central frequency (FB-00=0): swing amplitude AW=frequency source

F0-07 times swing amplitude FB-01.
 If relative to the maximum frequency (FB-00=1): swing amplitude AW=maximum

frequency F0-12 times swing amplitude FB-01.
Kick frequency=swing amplitude AW times kick frequency amplitude FB-02. That is the
value of kick frequency relative to the swing amplitude when the swing frequency is
running.
 If relative to the central frequency (FB-00=0), the kick frequency is a variable value.
 If relative to the maximum frequency (FB-00=1), the kick frequency is a fixed value.
The swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.

FB-03 Swing frequency cycle 0.0s-3000.0s 10.0s
179

Triangular wave rising time

FB-04 0.0%-100.0% 50.0%
coefficient
Swing frequency cycle refers to the time of a complete cycle of swing frequency.
FB-04 is the time percentage of triangular wave rising time to swing frequency cycle.
 Triangular wave rising time =swing frequency cycle FB-03 × t triangular wave rising
time coefficient FB-04 (unit: s)
 Triangular wave falling time =swing frequency cycle FB-03 × (1-triangular wave rising
time coefficient FB-04 (unit: s)

FB-05 Set length 0m-65535m 1000m
FB-06 Actual length 0m-65535m 0m
FB-07 The number of pulses each meter
The set length, actual length and number of pulses each meter are mainly used for fixed
length control.
The length information is obtained via collection of DI terminals. The actual length FB-06
is calculated by dividing the number of pulses each meter FB-07 by the number of pulses
collected by the DI.
When the actual length FB-06 exceeds the set length FB-05, the “Length reaching” ON
signal will be output via DO.
During the length control, the length reset operation (DI allocated with function 28) can be
performed via DI terminal. Refer to F4-00 to F4-09 for reference.
Allocate corresponding DI terminal with function 27 (length count input) in applications.

DI5 must be used at high pulse frequency.

FB-08 Set counting value 1-65535 1000
FB-09 Designated counting value 1-65535 1000
The counting value needs to be collected by DI terminal. Allocate corresponding DI

terminal with function 25 “counting input” in applications. DI5 must be used at high pulse
frequency.
When the counting value reaches the set counting value (FB-08), the “set counting value
reaching” ON signal is output via DO. Then the counter stops counting.
When the counting value reaches the designated counting value (FB-09), the “designated
counting value reaching” ON signal is output via DO. Then the counter continues to count
until reaching the set counting value.
FB-09 should be equal to or smaller than FB-08. The set counting value reaching and
180

designated counting value reaching are shown as below:
Group FC: Multi-command and Simple PLC Function
MD380 multi-command has more functions than the commonly used multi-speed. Besides
multi-speed function, it can be used as the setting source of the V/F separated voltage
source and setting source of process PID. In addition, the multi-command is relative
value.
The simple PLC function is different from the MD380 user programmable function. Simple
PLC can only complete simple combination of multi-commands. But the user
programmable function is more practical. Please refer to group A7.

-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-00 Command 0
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-01 Command 1
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-02 Command 2
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-03 Command 3
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-04 Command 4
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-05 Command 5
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-06 Command 6
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-07 Command 7
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-08 Command 8
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-09 Command 9
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-10 Command 10
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-11 Command 11
100.0%
-100.0% to 0.0%
FC-12 Command 12
100.0%
181


FC-13 Command 13 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
FC-14 Command 14 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
FC-15 Command 15 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
Multi-command can be the setting source of frequency, V/F separated voltage and
process PID. The multi-command is relative value and ranges from -100.0% to 100.0%.
As frequency source, it is percentage relative to maximum frequency. As V/F separated
voltage source, it is percentage relative to motor rated voltage. As process PID setting
source, it does not require conversion.
Multi-command can be switched over through different statues of DI. For details, see
group F4.

0: Stop after the inverter runs one cycle 0
1: Keep final values after the inverter runs
Simple PLC
FC-16 one cycle
running mode
2: Start another cycle after the inverter runs
one cycle
 0: Stop after the inverter runs one cycle
The inverter stops after running one cycle, and will not start up until another
command comes.
 1: Keep final values after the inverter runs one cycle
The inverter keeps the final running frequency and direction after running one cycle.
 2: Continue after the inverter runs one cycle
The inverter automatically starts another cycle after running one cycle, and will not
stop until the stop command comes.
Simple PLC can be either the frequency source or V/F separated voltage source.
As frequency source, parameters of FC-00 to FC-15 determine the running direction. If the
parameter is set to a negative value, the inverter runs in reverse direction. The simple
PLC running diagram is shown as below:
182


Unit’s digit Retentive selection upon 00
power failure
0: No retentive
Simple PLC
1: Retentive
FC-17 retentive
Ten’s digit Retentive selection upon
selection
power stop
0: No retentive
1: Retentive
PLC retentive upon power failure indicates that the inverter memorized the PLC running
stage and running frequency before power failure and will continue to run from the
memorized stage once it is powered on again. If the unit’s digit is set to 0, the inverter
restarts the PLC process once it is repowered on.
PLC retentive upon stop indicates that the inverter records the PLC running stage and
running frequency upon stop and will continue to run from the recorded stage once it is
powered on again. If the ten’s digit is set to 0, the inverter restarts the PLC process once it
is repowered on.

FC-18 Running time of command 0 of simple PLC 0.0s(h)-6553.5s(h) 0.0s(h)
Acceleration/deceleration time of command 0 0-3 0
FC-19
of simple PLC
FC-21
of simple PLC
FC-23
of simple PLC
183


FC-25
of simple PLC
FC-27
of simple PLC
FC-29
of simple PLC
FC-31
of simple PLC
FC-33
of simple PLC
FC-35
of simple PLC
FC-37
of simple PLC
FC-39
of simple PLC
FC-41
of simple PLC
FC-43
of simple PLC
FC-45
of simple PLC
FC-47
of simple PLC
FC-49
of simple PLC
0: s (second) 0
FC-50 Simple PLC running time unit
1:h (hour)
184


0: Set by FC-00 0
1: AI1
2: AI2
Command 0 3: AI3
FC-51
source 4: Pulse setting
5: PID
6: set by preset frequency (F0-08) modified
via UP/DOWN
It determines the setting channel of command 0. Besides FC-00, the command 0 has the
other 6 options, convenient for switchover between multi-command and other setting
modes. When multi-command or simple PLC is used as frequency source, the switchover
of two frequency sources can be realized easily.
Group FD: Communication Parameters
Refer to the “MD380 Communication Protocol”.
Group FE: User Defined Function Codes

FE-00 User defined function code 0 F0.00-FP.xx, A0.00-Ax.xx, U0.xx F0.00
FE-01 User defined function code 1 Same as FE-00 F0.02
185


Group FE is user defined parameter group. The user can combine the desired parameters
from all MD380 functions codes into group FE, convenient for query and modification.
Group FE provides a maximum of 30 user defined parameters. If FE.00 is displayed, it

indicates group FE is null. After entering user defined function code mode, the displayed
parameters are defined by FE-00 to FE-31 and the sequence is consistent with that in
group FE.
Group FP: User Password

FP-00 User password 0-65535 0
If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. Once
enabled, please input correct password once you enter the menu. Otherwise, you cannot
query and modify the function codes. Please remember your password.
If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared to disable the
password protection function.

0: No operation
1: Restore factory settings except
motor parameters
FP-01 Parameter initialization 0
2: Clear records
4: Restore user backup parameters
501: Back up current user parameters
 1: Restore factory settings except motor parameters.
If F9-01 is set to 1, most inverter function codes are restored to the factory settings
except motor parameters, frequency command resolution (F0-22), fault records,
accumulative running time (F7-09), accumulative power-on time (F7-13) and
accumulative power consumption (F7-14).
 2: Clear records.
If F9-01 is set to 2, the fault records, accumulative running time (F7-09), accumulative
power-on time (F7-13) and accumulative power consumption (F7-14) are cleared.
 4: Restore user backup parameters

186

If F9-01 is set to 4, the previous backup user parameters are restored.
 501: Back up current user parameters
If F9-01 is set to 501, the user’s currently set parameters are backed up, helping the
user to restore after wrong parameter adjustment.

Group U display selection
Unit’s digit 0: Not display
Parameter display 1: Display
FP-02 11
property Group A display selection
Ten’s digit 0: Not display
1: Display
User defined parameter
display selection
Unit’s digit
0: Not display
Individualized
1: Display
FP-03 parameter display 00
User modified parameter
property
display selection
Ten’s digit
0: Not display
1: Display
The setting of parameter display mode aims to facilitate the user to query different types of
parameters based on actual needs. MD380 provides the following three parameter display
modes:
Name Description
Function code display Display the inverter function codes in sequence
of F0-FF, A0-AF and U0-UF.
User defined parameter Display up to 32 user defined parameters in
display group FE.
User modified parameter Display the parameters that are modified.
display
If FP-03 only has one digit display, you can enter different parameter display modes via
key QUICK. The default value is only the parameter display mode.
The display codes of different parameter types are shown as below:
Parameter Type Display Code

Parameter
User defined parameter
User modified parameter
MD380 provides display of two types of individualized parameters: user defined

parameters and user modified parameters.
187

 The user defined parameters are combined by the user in group FE. The user can
define up to 32 parameters, convenient for commissioning.
In user defined parameter mode, symbol “u” is added before the function code. For
example, F1-00 is displayed as uF1-00.
 The user modified parameters are combined by the user, convenient for on-site
troubleshooting. In the user modified parameter mode, symbol “c” is added before the
function code. For example, F1-00 is displayed as cF1-00.

Parameter modification 0: Modifiable
FP-04 0
property 1: Not modifiable
It is used to set whether the parameter is modifiable so as to avoid malfunction. If it is set

to 0, all parameters are modifiable. If it is set to 1, all parameters can only be queried.
Group A0: Torque Control and Restricting Parameters

0: Speed control
A0-00 Speed/Torque control selection 0
1: Torque control
It is used to select the inverter control mode: speed control or torque control.
MD380 provides DI terminals with two torque related functions, torque control prohibited
(function 29) and speed/torque control switchover (function 46). A0-00 needs to support
the DI to realize speed/torque control switchover.
If the DI allocated with speed/torque control switchover is invalid, the control mode is
determined by A0-00. If speed/torque control switchover is valid, the control mode is
equivalent to reversing the value of A0-00.
However, if the DI allocated with the torque control prohibited function, the inverter is in
speed control mode.

0: Digital setting (A0-03)
1: AI1
2: AI2
Selection of torque setting 3: AI3
A0-01 0
source in torque control mode 4: Pulse setting (DI5)
6: MIN(AI1, AI2)
7: MAX(AI1, AI2)
Torque digital setting in torque -200.0% to 200.0%
A0-03 150.0%
control mode
A0-01 is used to set the torque setting source. There are a total of 8 modes to set torque.
The torque setting is relative value. 100.0% corresponds to the inverter rated torque. The
188

setting range is -200.0% to 200.0%, indicating the inverter’s maximum torque is twice of
inverter rated torque.
If the torque setting is positive, the inverter rotates forwardly. If the torque setting is
negative, the inverter rotates reversely.
 1: Digital setting (A0-03)
The target torque directly uses the value set in A0-03.
 2: AI1
 3: AI2
 4: AI3
The target torque is decided by analog inputs. The MD380 control board provides two
AI terminals (AI1, AI2). Another AI terminal (AI3) is provided by the I/O extension card.
AI1 is 0V-10V voltage input, AI2 is 0V-10V voltage input or 4mA-20mA current input
decided by J8 jumper on the control board, and AI3 is -10V to 10V voltage input.
The user can freely select the corresponding curve between the input voltage of AI1,
AI2 and AI3 and target frequency.
MD380 provides 5 curves, three of which are linear (point-point) correspondence and
two of which are four-point corresponding curves. The user can set the curves via
parameters F4-13 to F4-27 and Group F6.
F4-33 is used to select curves for AI1, AI2 and AI3. When AI is used as frequency
setting channel, voltage/current input corresponding value 100% corresponds to
A0-10 (maximum frequency).
The target torque is set via DI5 (high-speed pulse). The pulse setting signal
specification is 9V-30V (voltage range) and 0kHz-100kHz (frequency range). The
pulse can only be input via DI5. The relationship of DI5 input pulse frequency and the
corresponding value is set in F4-28 to F4-31. The corresponding relationship is
two-point linear. Corresponding value 100.0% corresponds to digital setting A0-03.
 5: Via communication
The target torque is set via communication.
If point-point communication is enabled and the salve receives data as torque source,
use the master transmission data as the setting value. For details, see the description
of group A8.
If Profibus-DP is valid and PZD1 is used for torque setting, directly use the data
transmitted by PDZ1. The data format is -100.00% to 100.00%. 100% is relative to
the torque digital setting (A0-03).
Otherwise, the data is given by host computer via communication address 0x1000.
The data format is -100.00% to 100.00%. 100% is relative to the torque digital setting
189

(A0-03).
MD380 supports four host computer communication modes: Modbus, Profibus-DP,

CANopen and CANlink. They cannot be used simultaneously.
If communication is selected, the communication card must be installed. MD380

provides 4 optional communication cards and the user can select a proper one. If
Modbus, Profibus-DP or CANopen is selected, corresponding serial communication
protocol shall be selected based on F0-28.
The CANlink protocol is valid all along.

Forward maximum frequency 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency
A0-05 50.00Hz
in torque control (F0-10)
Reverse maximum frequency 0.00Hz-Maximum frequency
A0-06 50.00Hz
in torque control (F0-10)
These two parameters are used to set the forward and reverse maximum frequency in
torque control mode.
In torque control, if the load torque is smaller than the motor output torque, the motor
rotating speed will rise continuously. To avoid runaway of the mechanical system, the
motor maximum rotating speed must be limited in torque control.
To continuously change maximum frequency in torque control, control the frequency

upper limit.

A0-07 Acceleration time in torque control 0.00s-65000s 0.00s
A0-08 Deceleration time in torque control 0.00s-65000s 0.00s
In torque control, the difference of the motor output torque and the load torque determines
the speed changing rate of the motor and load. The motor rotating speed may change
quickly and this will result in noise or too big mechanical stress. The setting of
acceleration/deceleration time in torque control make the motor rotating speed change
softly.
But in applications requiring rapid torque response, set the acceleration/deceleration time
in torque control to 0. For example, two inverters are connected to drive one load. Set one
inverter as master in speed control and the other as slave in torque control. The slave
receives the master’s torque command and must respond to the master rapidly. Thus the
acceleration/deceleration time in torque control of the slave is set to 0.0s.
Group A1: Virtual DI/DO

A1-00 Virtual VDI1 function selection 0-59 0
190


Virtual VDI1 to VDI5 have the same functions as DI terminals on the control board and
can be used for digital input. For more details, see description of F4-00 to F4-09.

Unit’s digit Virtual VDI1
0: Decided by status of virtual DOx
1: Decided by A1-06
Ten’s digit Virtual VDI2
Virtual VDI (0, 1, same as VDI1)
A1-05 valid status Hundred’s digit Virtual VDI3 00000
setting mode (0, 1, same as VDI1)
Thousand’s digit Virtual VDI4
(0, 1, same as VDI1)
Ten thousand’s Virtual VDI5
digit (0, 1, same as VDI1)
Unit’s digit VDI1 valid status selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten’s digit VDI2 valid status selection
Virtual VDI (0, 1, same as VDI1)
A1-06 valid status Hundred’s digit VDI3 valid status selection 00000
selection (0, 1, same as VDI1)
Thousand’s digit VDI4 valid status selection
(0, 1, same as VDI1)
Ten thousand’s VDI5 valid status selection
digit (0, 1, same as VDI1)
Different from DI terminals, virtual VDI status can be set in two modes:
 Decided by status of virtual DOx
Whether VDI is valid is determined by the status of VDO and VDIx solely binds to
VDOx (x is 1-5). For example, to realize the function that the inverter alarms and
stops when the AI1 input exceeds the limit, please do the following settings:
Allocate VDI1 with function 44 “User defined fault 1” (A1-00=44), set A1-05= xxx0 and
set VDO1 with function 31 “AI1 input exceeding limit” (A1-11=31).
When the AI1 input exceeds the limit, the VDO1 output is ON. This time the VDI1
becomes valid and the inverter receives the user defined fault 1. Then the inverter
reports Err27 and stops
 Decided by A1-06
191

The VDI status is determined by the binary bit of A1-06. For example, to realize the
function that the inverter automatically enters the running status after power-on,
please do the following settings:
Allocate VDI1 with function 1 ”Forward RUN (FWD)”, set A1-05=xxx1, set VDI1 status
to valid (A1-06=xxx1), set the command source to terminal control (F0-02=1) and set
startup protection selection to no protection (F8-18=0).
When the inverter completes initialization after power-on, it detects VDI1 valid and
VDI1 corresponds to forward RUN. That is, inverter receives the forward RUN
command from the terminal. The inverter immediately starts to run in forward
direction.

A1-07 0-59 0
selection
A1-08 0-59 0
selection
A1-09 0-59 0
selection
AI1
Unit’s digit 0: High level valid
1: Low level valid
AI used as DI valid status
A1-10 AI2 (0, 1, same as 000
selection Ten’s digit
unit’s digit)
AI3 (0, 1, same as
Hundred’s digit
unit’s digit)
These parameters are used when AI is used as DI. When AI is used as DI, AI status is
high level if the AI input voltage is 7V or more and AI status is low level if the AI input
voltage is 3V or less. It is hysteresis if the AI input voltage is 3V-7V. A1-10 is used to
determine whether high level valid or low level valid when AI is used as DI.
The setting of AI (used as DI) function is the same as that of DI. Refer to related
description group F4.
The following figure takes AI input voltage as an example to describe the relationship of AI
input voltage and corresponding DI status, shown as below:
192


0: Jump out with physical Dix internally
Virtual VDO1 function
A1-11 1-40: Refer to physical DO function 0
selection
selection
selection
selection
selection
A1-16 VDO1 output delay time 0.0s-3600.0s 0.0s
VDO1
VDO valid status
A1-21 Unit’s digit 0: Positive logic 00000
selection
1: Reverse logic
Ten’s digit VDO2 (0, 1, same
as unit’s digit)
Hundred’s digit VDO3 (0, 1, same
as unit’s digit)
Thousand’s digit VDO4 (0, 1, same
as unit’s digit)
193


Ten thousand’s VDO5 (0, 1, same
digit as unit’s digit)
Virtual VDO output functions are similar to the DO output functions on the control board.
The VDOs can be used to match VDIx to realize some simple logic control.
 If VDO is allocated with function 0, the output status of VDO1-VDO5 is determined by

the input status of DI1-DI5 on the control board. In this case, VDOx and DIx are
one-to-one responding.
 If VDO is allocated with functions except 0, the function setting and use of VDOx are
the same as DO in group F5.
As well, the VDOx output valid status can be set by selecting positive logic or reverse logic
in A1-21. The application example of VDIx involves the use of VDOx, see the example for
your reference.
Group A2-A4: 2nd Motor-4th Motor
MD380 can switch over the running of the four motors. The four motors can set motor
nameplate parameters respectively, perform motor parameter tuning respectively, select
V/F control or vector control respectively, set encoder related parameters respectively and
set parameters related to V/F control or vector control independently.
Group A2, A3 and A4 correspond to 2nd motor, 3rd motor and 4th motor, respectively.
Their function code arrangements are consistent. Here we just list the parameters of
group A2 for reference.
Meanwhile, all parameters in group A2 have the same definition and usage as parameters
of 1st motor do. For more details, refer to description of parameters of 1st motor.
Function
Code
A2-00 Motor type selection 1: Variable frequency asynchronous motor 0
2: Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Model
A2-01 Rated power 0.1kW-1000.0kW
dependent
Model
A2-02 Rated voltage 1V-2000V
dependent
0.01A-655.35A (inverter power<=55kW) Model
A2-03 Rated current
0.1A-6553.5A (inverter power>55kW) dependent
Model
A2-04 Rated frequency 0.01Hz-Maximum frequency
dependent
Model
A2-05 Rated rotating speed 1rpm-65535rpm
dependent
A2-06 Stator resistance 0.001Ω-65.535Ω (inverter power<=55kW) Model
194

Function
Code
Rotor resistance 0.001Ω-65.535Ω (inverter power<=55kW) Model
A2-07
Leakage inductive
power<=55kW) Model
A2-08 Reactance
power>55kW)
Mutual inductive
0.1mH-6553.5mH (inverter power<=55kW) Model
A2-09 Reactance
0.01mH-655.35mH (inverter power>55kW) dependent
A2-10
A2-16
(synchronous motor) 0.0001Ω-6.5535Ω (inverter power>55kW) dependent
A2-17
power>55kW)
A2-18
power>55kW)
Counter electromotive force Model
A2-20 0.1V-6553.5V
(synchronous motor) dependent
A2-27 1-65535 1024
pulses
A2-28 The type of encoder 2: Rotary encoder 0
3: SIN/COS encoder
A, B phase sequence of ABZ 0: Forward
A2-30 0
incremental encoder 1: Reserve
A2-31 Encoder installation angle 0.0°-359.9° 0.0°
U, V, W phase sequence of 0: Forward
A2-32 0
UVW encoder 1: Reverse
A2-33 UVW encoder angle bias 0.0°-359.9° 0.0°
The number of pole-pairs of
A2-34 1-65535 1
rotary encoder
A2-36 0.0s
195

Function
Code
0: No tuning
A2-37 Tuning selection 2: Asynchronous motor complete tuning 0
11: Synchronous motor with-load tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load tuning
Speed loop proportional gain
A2-38 0-100 30
1
A2-39 Speed loop integral time 1 0.01s-10.00s 0.50s
A2-40 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to A2-43 5.00Hz
Speed loop proportional gain
A2-41 0-100 15
2
A2-42 Speed loop integral time 2 0.01s-10.00s 1.00s
A2-43 Switchover frequency 2 A2-40 to maximum output frequency 10.00Hz
A2-44 Vector control slip gain 50%-200% 100%
Time constant of speed loop
A2-45 0.000s-0.100s 0.000s
filter
Vector control over-excitation
A2-46 0-200 64
gain
0: A2-48
1: AI1
2: AI2
Torque upper limit source in 3: AI3
A2-47 0
speed control mode 4: Pulse setting (DI5)
6: MIN(AI1,AI2)
7: MIN(AI1,AI2)
Digital setting of torque upper
A2-48 0.0%-200.0% 150.0%
limit in speed control mode
A2-51 0-20000 2000
proportion gain
Excitation adjustment integral
A2-52 0-20000 1300
gain
Torque adjustment
A2-53 0-20000 2000
proportion gain
A2-54 0-20000 1300
gain
A2-55 Speed loop integral property 0: Disabled 0
1: Enabled
Synchronous motor field 0: No field weakening
A2-56 0
weakening mode 1: Direct calculation
196

Function
Code
2: Adjustment
A2-57 50%-500% 100%
weakening degree
A2-58 1%-300% 50%
current
A2-59 10%-500% 100%
adjustment gain
A2-60 2-10 2
multiple
2nd motor control mode 0: Speed sensorless vector control (SVC ) 0
A2-61 1: Speed sensor vector control (FVC)
2: V/F control
nd
2 motor 1: Acceleration/Deceleration time 1
A2-62 acceleration/deceleration 2: Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 0
A2-63 2nd motor torque boost
nd
2 motor oscillation Model
A2-65 0-100
Group A5: Control Optimization Parameters

A5-00 DPWM switchover frequency upper limit 0.00Hz-15Hz 12.00Hz
This parameter is only valid for V/F control.
It is used to determine the wave form in V/F control of asynchronous motor. If the
frequency is lower than the value in A5-00, the wave form is 7-segment continuous
modulation. Otherwise, the wave form is 5-segment broken modulation.
Under 7-segment continuous modulation, the inverter switch deteriorates more but
smaller current ripple is brought. Under 5-segment broken modulation, the inverter switch
deteriorates less but bigger current ripple is brought. But this may lead to the motor
running instability at high frequency. Do not modify this parameter generally.
For instability of V/F control, refer to parameter F3-11. For inverter deterioration and
temperature rise, refer to parameter F0-15.

0: Asynchronous modulation
A5-00 PWM modulation mode 0
1: Synchronous modulation
This parameter is only valid for V/F control.

197

Synchronous modulation indicates carrier frequency varies linearly with the change of
output frequency so as to ensure the ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency.
Synchronous modulation is generally used at high output frequency to ensure output
voltage quality.
At low output frequency (100Hz or less), synchronous modulation is not required. This is
because asynchronous modulation is preferred when the ratio of carrier frequency to
output frequency is high.
When the running frequency is 85Hz or more, synchronous modulation takes effect. If
below 85Hz, asynchronous modulation remains unchanged.

0: No compensation
Dead zone compensation
A5-02 1: Compensation mode 1 1
mode selection
2: Compensation mode 2
Generally, you do not need to modify this parameter. Only when there is special
requirement on output voltage waveform quality or oscillation occurs to the motor, attempt
to select different compensation mode.
For high power inverter, compensation mode 2 is recommended.

0: Random PWM invalid
A5-03 Random PWM depth 0
1-10: PWM carrier frequency random depth
The setting of random PWM can make the shrill motor noise soft and reduce the
electromagnetic interference. If A5-03 is set to 0, random PWM is invalid.

0: Disabled
A5-04 Rapid current limit selection 1
1: Enabled
The rapid current limit function can reduce the inverter over-current faults at maximum so
as to ensure that the inverter runs normally.
But long-time rapid current limit may cause the inverter overheated, which is not allowed.
In this case, the inverter will report Err40, indicating the inverter is overloaded and needs
to stop.

A5-05 Current detection compensation 0-100 5
It is used to set the inverter current detection compensation. Too big setting may lead to a
decline in control performance. Do not modify it generally.

A5-06 Under-voltage point setting 60.0%-140.0% 100.0%
It is used to set the voltage value of inverter under-voltage fault Err09. The under-voltage
198

point 100% of the inverter of different voltage classes correspond to different norminal
values, shown as below:
Norminal Value of
Voltage Class
Under-voltage Point
Single-phase 220V 200V

0: No optimization
A5-07 SVC optimization mode selection 1: Optimization mode 1 1
2: Optimization mode 2
 Optimization mode 1: Used for high requirement on torque control linearity.
 Optimization mode 2: Used for high requirement on speed stability.

A5-08 Dead-zone time adjustment 100%-200% 150%
It is only valid for 1140V voltage class. Adjustment of this parameter can improve effective
utilization rate of voltage. Too small setting may cause the system to run unsteadily. Do
not modify it generally.

A5-09 Over-voltage point setting 200.0V-2500.0V 2000.0V
It is used to set the voltage value of inverter over-voltage fault. The default value of
different voltage classes are as follows:
Default Value of
Voltage Class
Over-voltage Point
Single-phase 220V 400.0V
Three-phase 220V 400.0V
Three-phase
2000.0V
1140V
Note The default value is also the upper limit of the inverter internal over-voltage protection
voltage. Only when the setting of A5-09 is lower than the default value, the parameter
becomes effective. If the setting is higher than the default value, take the default value.
199

Group A6: AI Curve Setting

A6-00 AI curve 4 minimum input -10.00V to A6-02 0.00V
A6-01 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
corresponding value
A6-02 AI curve 4 inflexion 1 input A6-00 to A6-04 3.00V
A6-03 -100.0% to 100.0% 30.0%
corresponding value
A6-05 -100.0% to 100.0% 60.0%
corresponding value
A6-06 AI curve 4 maximum input A6-06 to 10.00V 10.00V
A6-07 -100.0% to 100.0% 100.0%
corresponding value
A6-08 AI curve 5 minimum input -10.00V to A6-10 0.00V
A6-09 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
corresponding value
A6-11 -100.0% to 100.0% 30.0%
corresponding value
A6-13 -100.0% to 100.0% 60.0%
corresponding value
A6-14 AI curve 5 maximum input A6-14 to 10.00V 10.00V
A6-15 -100.0% to 100.0% 100.0%
corresponding value
The function of curve 4 and curve 5 is similar to curve 1 to curve 3. But if curve 1 to curve
3 are lines, and curve 4 and curve 5 are 4-point curves, more flexible corresponding
relationship can be realized. The curve 4 and curve 5 are shown as below:
200

When setting curve 4 and curve 5, note that the curve’s minimum input voltage, inflexion 1
voltage, inflexion 2 voltage and maximum voltage must have increments one by one.
F4-33 (AI curve selection) is used to select curve for AI1 to AI3.

A6-16 AI1 input corresponding value jump point -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0%
A6-17 AI1 input corresponding value jump amplitude 0.0%-100.0% 0.5%
MD380’s analog input channels (AI1 to AI3) all have the corresponding value jump
function, which fixes the AI input corresponding value at the jump point unchanged when
AI input corresponding value varies.
For example, AI1 input voltage jumps at 5.00V and the jump range is 4.90V-5.10V. AI1
minimum input 0.00V corresponds to 0.0% and maximum input 10.00V corresponds to
100.0%. Thus the detected AI1 input corresponding value varies between 49.0% and
51.0%.
If you set A6-16 to 50.0% and A6-17 to 1.0%, then the AI1 input corresponding value
becomes 50.0% unchanged, eliminating the fluctuation.
Group A7: User Programmable Function
Refer to the “Description of User Programmable Control Card”.
Group A8: Point-point Communication

0: Disabled 0
A8-00 Point-point communication selection
1: Enabled
Thi
s parameter is used to decide whether to enable point-point communication.
 Point-point communication indicates direct communication between two MD380
inverters via CANlink.The master gives target frequency or target torque to the slave
according to its own frequency or torque signal.
 If two inverters are connected via CANlink cards, the terminal resistor of one CANlink
card shall be switched on.
 If point-point communication is enabled, the CANlink communication addresses of
the two inverters are automatically matched without special setting.
 The velocity of point-point communication is set by Fd-00.

A8-01 Master and slave selection 0: Master 0
201

1: Slave
This parameter is used to determine whether the inverter is master or slave.
At point-point communication, you need to set the CANlink communication baud rate only.
The communication address is allocated automatically the current master or slave.

0: Output torque 0
Master sending data 1: Running frequency
A8-02
source selection 2: Set frequency
3: Feedback speed
It is used to select the master sending data source. The sending data is converted to the
format of 100.00%. You can query the sending data in U0-63. The relationship of data
source converted to sending data in the format of 100.00% is as follows:
Data Source Actual Data Sending Data

Output torque -200.0% to 200.0%
Running frequency
-Maximum frequency to -100.00% to 100.00%
Set frequency
Maximum frequency
Feedback speed

0: Torque setting 0
A8-03 Slave receiving data role selection
1: Frequency setting
The slave receives the data from the master for torque or frequency setting with the
prerequisite that the frequency/torque source is communication.
For torque setting via point-point communication, the slave receiving data 100.00%
corresponds to torque setting 200.0% and is unrelated to A0-03. In the condition that
slave zero offset is 0.00% and the gain is 1.00, it is equivalent the slave directly takes the
master output torque as its target torque.
For frequency setting via point-point communication, the slave receiving data 100.00%
corresponds to F0-10 (maximum frequency).
For example, to balance the load, do the following settings:
Master Slave
A0-00=0, run in speed mode A0-00=1, run in torque mode
A8-00=1, point-point communication enabled A8-00=1, point-point communication enabled
A8-01=0, point-point communication master A8-01=1, point-point communication slave
A8-02=0, master sending output torque A8-03=0, slave receiving data for torque setting
A0-01=5, torque source selecting communication
in torque control
202


A8-04 Receiving data zero bias -100.00% to 100.00% 0.00%
A8-05 Receiving data gain -10.00 to 10.00 1.00
These two parameters are used to correct the receiving data. If “b” expresses the
receiving data zero bias, “k” expresses the gain, and “y” expresses the actually used data.
The actually used data can be obtained from the formula y = kx + b, ranging from
-100.00% to 100.00%.

Point-point communication 1.0s
A8-06 0.0s-10.0s
interruption detection time
It is used to set the point-point communication interruption detection time. If it is set to 0, it

indicates no detection.

Point-point communication 0.001s
A8-07 0.001s-10.000s
master sending data cycle
It is used to set the data sending cycle of the master at point-point communication.
Group AC: AI/AO correction

AC-00 AI1 measured voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V Factory-corrected
AC-01 AI1 displayed voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V Factory-corrected
AC-02 AI1 measured voltage 2 6.000V-9.999V Factory-corrected The
AC-03 AI1 displayed voltage 2 6.000V-9.999V Factory-corrected se
AC-04 AI2 measured voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V Factory-corrected par
AC-05 AI2 displayed voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V Factory-corrected am
AC-06 AI2 measured voltage 2 6.000V-9.999V Factory-corrected eter
AC-07 AI2 displayed voltage 2 9.999V-10.000V Factory-corrected s
AC-08 AI3 measured voltage 1 9.999V-10.000V Factory-corrected are
AC-09 AI3 displayed voltage 1 9.999V-10.000V Factory-corrected use
AC-10 AI3 measured voltage 2 9.999V-10.000V Factory-corrected d to
AC-11 AI3 displayed voltage 2 9.999V-10.000V Factory-corrected
corr
ect
analog input (AI) so as to eliminate the impact of AI inputs on zero bias and gain.
They have been corrected upon delivery. When you resume the factory values, these
parameters will be resumed to the factory-corrected values. Generally, you do not need to
perform correction in the applications.
Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by multimeter or the
like. Displayed voltage indicates the voltage display value sampled by the inverter. For
details, refer to U0-21, U0-22 and U0-23.
Input two voltage values to each AI terminal. Save correct measured values and displayed
203

values to the function codes AC-00 to AC-11. Then the inverter will automatically perform
AI zero bias and gain correction.
If the user given voltage and the inverter actual sampling are inconsistent, perform
correction on site. Take AI1 as an example. The on-site correction is as follows:
1. Give the AI1 voltage signal (approximately 2V).
Save the actually measure AI1 voltage value to AC-00.
Query the displayed value in U0-21 and save the value to AC-01.
2. Give the AI1 voltage signal (approximately 8V).
Save the actually measure AI1 voltage value to AC-02.
Query the displayed value in U0-21 and save the value to AC-03.
When correcting AI2 and AI3, the actually sampling voltage is queried in U0-22 and U0-23,
respectively.
For AI1 and AI2, 2V and 8V are suggested as the correction points. For AI3, -8V and 8V
are suggested.

AC-12 AO1 target voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V Factory-corrected
AC-13 AO1 measured voltage 1 0.500V-4.000V Factory-corrected
These parameters are used to correct the analog output (AO). They have been corrected
by the factory. When you resume the factory values, these parameters will be resumed to
the factory-corrected values. The user does not need to perform correction in the
applications.
Target voltage indicates the inverter theoretical output voltage value. Measured voltage
indicates the actual output voltage value measured by multimeter or the like.
Group U0: Monitoring Parameters
Group U0 is used to monitor the inverter running status. The user can query the
parameters via operation panel, convenient for on-site commissioning. The parameters
can also be read via communication (address: 0x7000-0x7044) for monitoring through
host computer.
U0-00 to U0-31 are the monitoring parameters in the running and stop status defined by
F7-03 and F7-04. For more details, see Table 6-1.
Function Code Name Display Range
204

U0-00 Running frequency 0.00-320.00Hz (F0-22=2)

U0-01 Set frequency 0.00-3200.0Hz (F0-22=1)
It displays the absolute value of theoretical running frequency and set frequency. For the
inverter actually output frequency, see U0-19.

U0-02 Bus voltage 0.0V-3000.0V
It displays the inverter bus voltage.

U0-03 Output voltage 0V-1140V
It displays the inverter output voltage at running status.

0.00A-655.35A (inverter of 55kW or less)
U0-04 Output current
0.0A-6553.5A (inverter of over 55kW)
It displays the inverter output current at running status.

U0-05 Output power 0-32767
It displays the inverter output power at running status.

U0-06 Output torque -200.0%-200.0%
It displays the inverter output torque at running status.

U0-07 DI input status 0-32767
It indicates the status of current DI inputs. After converted into the binary system, each bit
corresponds to one DI. “1” indicates high level signal, while “0” indicates low level signal.
The corresponding relationship of each bit and the DI is shown as below:
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10
Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15
VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI5

U0-08 DO output status 0-1023
It indicates the status of current DO outputs. After converted into the binary system, each
bit corresponds to one DO. “1” indicates high level signal, while “0” indicates low level
signal. The corresponding relationship of each bit and the DO is shown as below:
205

Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5

DO3 Relay 1 Relay 2 DO1 DO2 VDO1
Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10 Bit11
VDO2 VDO3 VDO4 VDO5

U0-14 Load speed display 0-65535
For more details, see the description of F7-12.

U0-15 PID setting display 0-65535
U0-16 PID feedback display 0-65535
They display the PID setting value and PID feedback value.
 PID setting = PID setting (percentage) *FA-04
 PID feedback = PID feedback (percentage) *FA-04

U0-18 Load speed display 0.00kHz-100.00KHz
It displays the DI5 high-speed pulse sampling frequency with minimum unit of 0.01kHz.

-320.00Hz to 320.00Hz
U0-19 Feedback speed
-3200.0Hz to 3200.0Hz
It displays the inverter actually output frequency.
 If F0-22 (frequency command resolution) is set to 1, the display range is -3200.00Hz

to 3200.00Hz.
 If F0-22(frequency command resolution) is set to 2, the display range is -320.00Hz to
320.00Hz.

U0-20 Remaining running time 0.0-6500.0min
It displays the remaining running time when the timing operation is enabled. For details on
timing operation, refer to F8-42 to F8-44.

U0-21 AI1 Voltage before correction 0.00V to 10.57V
U0-22 AI2 Voltage before correction 0.00V to 10.57V
U0-23 AI3 Voltage before correction -10.57V to 10.57V
They display the sampling voltage value of analog input. The actual corrected voltage is
obtained after linear correction so as to reduce the deviation of sampling voltage and
actual input.
206

For actual corrected voltage, see U0-09, U0-10 and U0-11.Refer to group AC for the
correction mode.

U0-24 Linear velocity 0-65535m/min
It displays the linear velocity of the DI5 high-speed pulse sampling. The unit is meter/min.
The linear velocity is obtained according to the actual number of pulses sampled per
minute and FB-07 (the number of pulses per meter).

U0-27 Pulse input frequency 0-65535Hz
It displays the DI5 high-speed pulse sampling frequency with minimum unit of 1Hz. It is
the same as U0-18. They adopt different units.

U0-28 Communication setting value -100.00% to 100.00%
It displays the data written in via communication address 0x1000.

-320.00Hz to 320.00Hz
U0-29 Encoder feedback speed
-3200.0Hz to 3200.0Hz
It displays the motor running frequency measured by the encoder.
 If F0-22 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3200.0Hz to

3200.0Hz.

320.00Hz.

0.00Hz-320.00Hz
U0-30 Main frequency X display
0.0Hz-3200.0Hz
It displays the setting of main frequency X.

3200.0Hz.

320.00Hz.

0.00Hz-320.00Hz
U0-31 Auxiliary frequency Y display
0.0Hz-3200.0Hz
It displays the setting of auxiliary frequency Y.

3200.0Hz.

207

320.00Hz.

U0-33 Synchronous motor rotor position 0.0°-359.9°
It displays the position of the synchronous motor rotor.

U0-34 Motor temperature value 0℃-200℃
It displays the motor temperature value via AI3 sampling. For the motor temperature
detection, see F9-56.

U0-35 Target torque -200.0% to 200.0%
It displays the current torque upper limit.

U0-36 Current rotary encoder position 0-4095
It displays the current rotary encoder position.

U0-37 Power factor angle
It displays the current power factor angle.

U0-38 ABZ position 0-65535
It displays the phase A and B pulse counting of the current ABZ or UVW encoders. This
value is four times of the number of pulses the encoder runs. For example, it displays
4000. The actual number of pulses the encoder runs is 4000/4=1000.
The value increase when the encoder rotates forwardly and decreases when the encoder
rotates reversely. Once increasing to 65535, the value starts to increase from 0 again.
Once decreasing to 0, the value starts to decrease from 65535 again.
You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by querying U0-38.

U0-39 V/F separated target voltage 0V-Motor rated voltage
U0-40 V/F separated output voltage 0V-Motor rated voltage
They display the target output voltage and currently actual output voltage in the V/F
separated status. For V/F separated, see description in group F3.

U0-41 DI input status display -
It displays the DI input status and the display format is shown as below:
208


U0-42 DO output status display -
It displays the DO output status and the display format is shown as below:

U0-43 DI function status display 1 -
It displays whether the DI functions 1-40 are valid. The operation panel has five nixie
tubes and each tube display the selection of 8 functions. The nixie tube is defined as
below:
The five nixie tubes display functions 1-8, 9-16, 17-24, 25-32 and 33-40, respectively from
right to left.

U0-44 DI function status display 2 -
It displays whether the DI functions 41-59 are valid. The display format is similar to U0-43.
The nixie tubes display functions 41-48, 49-56 and 57-59, respectively from right to left.

U0-58 Phase Z counting 0-65535
It displays the phase Z counting of the current ABZ or UVW encoder. The value increases
or decreases 1 once the encoder rotates one revolution forwardly or reversely.
You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by querying U0-58.

U0-59 Set frequency -100.00% to 100.00%
U0-60 Running frequency -100.00% to 100.00%
It displays the current set frequency and running frequency. 100.00% corresponds to the
209

inverter’s maximum frequency (F0-10).

U0-61 Inverter running status 0-65535
It displays the inverter’s running status. The Data format is as follows:
Bit0 0: Stop
1: Forward
Bit1
2: Reverse
Bi2 0: Constant
U0-61
1: Accelerate
Bit3
2: Decelerate
0: Bus voltage normal
Bit4
1: Under-voltage

U0-62 Current error code 0-99
It displays the current error code.

U0-63 Point-point communication sending value -100.00% to 100.00%
U0-64 Point-point communication receiving value -100.00% to 100.00%
It displays the data at point-point communication. U0-63 is the master sending data, and
U0-64 is the salve receiving data.

U0-65 Torque upper limit -200.00% to 200.00%
It displays the current setting torque upper limit.
210

Chapter 7 EMC
7.1 Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of the electric equipment to run in the
electromagnetic interference environment and implement its function stably without
interferences on the electromagnetic environment.
7.2 Introduction to EMC Standard

In accordance with the requirements of the national standard GB/T12668.3, the inverter
needs to comply with the electromagnetic interference and anti- electromagnetic
interference requirements.
The existing products of our company apply the latest international

standard—IEC/EN61800-3: 2004 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems part 3:
EMC requirements and specific test methods), which is equivalent to the national
standard GB/T12668.3.
IEC/EN61800-3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and

anti-electronic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation
interference, conduction interference and harmonics interference on the inverter (required
for the inverter applied for civil use). Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests the
conduction interference rejection, radiation interference rejection, surge interference
rejection, fast and mutable pulse group interference rejection, ESD interference rejection
and power low frequency end interference rejection. The specific test items involve:
1. Interference rejection tests of input voltage sag, interrupt and change
2. Phase conversion interference rejection test
3. Harmonic input interference rejection test
4. Input frequency change test
5. Input voltage unbalance test;
6. Input voltage fluctuation test
The tests shall be conducted strictly in accordance with the above requirements of
IEC/EN61800-3, and the products of our company are installed and used according to
section 7.3 and have good electromagnetic compatibility in general industry environment.
7.3 EMC Guide
7.3.1 Harmonic Effect
211

Higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter. Thus, at some places where
mains quality is rather poor, it is recommended to install AC input reactor.
7.3.2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences, one is interference of

electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the inverter, and the other is
interference of the inverter on the surrounding equipment.
 Installation Precautions:
1. The earth wires of the inverter and other electric products shall be well grounded;
2. The power input and output power cables of the inverter and weak current signal
cables (e.g. control line) shall not be arranged in parallel and vertical arrangement is
preferable.
3. It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter employ shield cables
or steel pipe shielded cables and that the shielding layer be earthed reliably. The lead
cables of the equipment suffering interferences are recommended to employ
twisted-pair shielded control cables, and the shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
4. When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters, it needs to install output
filter or reactor.
7.3.3 How to Handle Interferences of Surrounding Equipment on the Inverter
The electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated because plenty of relays,

contactors and electromagnetic brakes are installed near the inverter. When the inverter
has error action due to the interferences, the following measures can be taken:
 Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference
 Install filter at the input end of the inverter. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for the specific
operations.
 The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line
employ shielded cable and the shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
7.3.4 How to Handle Interferences of the Inverter on Surrounding Equipment
These interferences include two types: one is radiation interference of the inverter, and
the other is conduction interference of the inverter. These two types of interferences
cause the surrounding electric equipment to suffer electromagnetic or electrostatic
induction. The surrounding equipment hereby produces error action. For different
interferences, it can be handled by referring to the following methods:
1. F
or the measuring meters, receivers and sensors, their signals are generally weak. If
they are placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control
212

cabinet, they are easy to suffer interference and thus generate error actions. It is
recommended to handle with the following methods: Put in places far away from the
interference source; do not arrange the signal cables with the power cables in parallel
and never bind them together; both the signal cables and power cables employ
shielded cables and are well earthed; install ferrite magnetic ring (with suppressing
frequency of 30 to 1,000MHz) at the output side of the inverter and wind it 2 to 3
cycles; install EMC output filter in more severe conditions.
2. W
hen the equipment suffering interferences and the inverter use the same power
supply, it may cause conduction interference. If the above methods cannot remove
the interference, it shall install EMC filter between the inverter and the power supply
(refer to Section 7.3.6 for the prototyping operation). The surrounding equipment is
separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the leakage current
of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
3. T
he surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference
caused by the leakage current of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode
is adopted.
7.3.5 Leakage Current and Handling
There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter. One is leakage current to
the earth, and the other is leakage current between the cables.
 F
actors influencing the leakage current to the earth and the solutions:
There are distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth. The larger
the distributed capacitance is, the larger the leakage current will be. The distributed
capacitance can be reduced by effectively reducing the distance between the inverter
and the motor. The higher the carrier frequency is, the larger the leakage current will
be. The leakage current can be reduced by reducing the carrier frequency. However,
reducing the carrier frequency may result in addition of motor noise. Note that
additional installation of reactor is also an effective method to remove the leakage
current.
The leakage current may increase following the addition of circuit current. Therefore,
when the motor power is high, the corresponding leakage current will be high too.
 F
actors of producing leakage current between the cables and solutions:
There is distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter. If the
current passing the lines has higher harmonic, it may cause resonance and thus
result in leakage current. If thermal relay is used, it may generate error action.
The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor. It is

213

recommended that thermal relay not be installed before the motor when using the
inverter, and that electronic over current protection function of the inverter be used
instead.
7.3.6 Precautions on Installing EMC Input Filter at Input End of Power Supply
1. W
hen using the inverter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the filter belongs to
Classification I electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter shall be large and
the metal ground of the installing cabinet shall be well earthed and have good
conduction continuity. Otherwise there may be danger of electric shock and the EMC
effect may be greatly affected.
2. T
hrough the EMC test, it is found that the filter ground must be connected with the PE
end of the inverter at the same public earth. Otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly
affected.
3. T
he filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as
much as possible.
214

Chapter 8 Faults and Protective Functions
8.1 Faults and Solutions

MD380 provides a total of the following pieces of fault information and protective functions.
Once a fault occurs in the inverter, the protective function acts and the inverter stops
outputs. Then the fault relay contact of the inverter acts and the fault code will be
displayed on operation panel.
Before consulting the service department, the user can read the instructions in this
chapter to find the cause of the fault and corresponding solution. If you still cannot solve
the problem, please feel free to contact the agent or our company.
Err22 is the inverter hardware over-current or over-voltage signal. In most situations,

hardware over-voltage fault causes Err22.
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
1: Check for the inverter 1: Check the wiring to ensure that

output short circuit. output short circuit does not occur.
2: Connecting cable between
2: Install a reactor or output filter
motor and inverter is too long.
3: Check whether the air filter is
3: Module overheated.
Inverter unit clogged and the cooling fan works
Err01 4: Connection inside the
protection normally.
inverter becomes loose.
4: Connect all cables.
5: Main control board
5: Contact the agent or our company.
abnormal.
6: Drive board abnormal.
7: Inverter module abnormal.
1: Check for the inverter 1: Check wiring to ensure that the
output grounding or short output grounding or short circuit does
circuit. not occur.
2: The inverter is in vector 2: Perform motor tuning.
control but motor tuning is not 3: Increase the deceleration time.
performed. 4: Adjust the manual torque boost or
Over-current 3: The acceleration time is too V/F curve.
during Err02 short. 5: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
acceleration 4: Manual torque boost or V/F 6: Select rotation speed tracking restart
curve is not appropriate. or start after the motor stops.
5: The voltage is too low. 7: Remove the additional load.
6: Start the rotating motor. 8: Select an inverter of bigger power
7: A load is suddenly added class.
during acceleration.
8: The inverter model is of too
215

small power class.

circuit. not occur.
control but motor tuning not 3: Increase the deceleration time.
Over-current performed. 4: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
during Err03 3: The deceleration time is too 5: Remove the additional load.
deceleration short. 6: Install the braking unit and brake
4: The voltage is too low. resistor.
5: A load is suddenly added
during deceleration.
6: The braking unit and brake
resistor are not installed.
circuit. not occur.
Over-current
control but motor tuning is not 3: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
during
Err04 performed. 4: Remove the additional load.
constant-speed
3: The voltage is too low. 5: Select an inverter of bigger power
operation
4: A load is suddenly added class.
during operation.
small power class.
1: Input voltage is too high. 1: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
2: An external force drives the 2: Cancel the external force or install
Overvoltage motor during acceleration. the brake resistor.
during Err05 3: The acceleration time is too 3: Increase the acceleration time.
acceleration short. 4: Install the braking unit and brake
4: The braking unit and brake resistor.
1: Input voltage is too high. 1: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
2: An external force drives the 2: Cancel the external force or install
Overvoltage motor during deceleration. the brake resistor.
during Err06 3: The deceleration time is too 3: Increase the deceleration time.
deceleration short. 4: Install the braking unit and brake
4: The braking unit and brake resistor.
Overvoltage 1: Input voltage is too high. 1: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
during 2: An external force drives the 2: Cancel the external force or install
Err07
constant-speed motor during deceleration. the brake resistor.
operation
Control power Err08 Input voltage is not within the Adjust the input voltage to the
216

supply fault allowable range. allowable range.

1: Instantaneous power-off 1: Reset the fault.
2: The inverter Input voltage is 2: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
not within the allowable range. 3: Contact the agent or our company.
3: Bus voltage abnormal. 4: Contact the agent or our company.
Under-voltage
Err09 4: Rectifier bridge and buffer 5: Contact the agent or our company.
fault
resistor are abnormal. 6: Contact the agent or our company.
5: Drive board abnormal.
6: Main control board
abnormal.
1: Check whether the load is 1: Reduce the load and check the
too heavy or the motor does motor and machine.
Inverter
Err10 not rotate. 2: Select an inverter of bigger power
overloaded
2: The inverter model is of too class.
small power class.
Err11 1: The Motor overload 1: Set F9-01 correctly.
protection gain (F9-01) setting 2: Reduce the load and check the
is improper. motor and machine.
Motor 2: Check whether the load is 3: Select an inverter of bigger power
overloaded too heavy or the motor does class
not rotate.
small power class.
1: Three-phase input power 1: Check wiring to ensure that no fault
supply is abnormal. occurs to external wiring.
Phase missing 2: Drive board abnormal. 2: Contact the agent or our company.
Err12
at input side 3: Lightening board abnormal. 3: Contact the agent or our company.
4: Main control board 4: Contact the agent or our company.
abnormal.
1: Check whether the 1: Check the wiring to ensure that the
connecting cable of the connecting cable is normal.
inverter and motor is normal. 2: Check whether the three-phase
Phase missing 2: The inverter three-phase winding of the motor is normal.
Err13
at output side output is unbalanced when the 3: Contact the agent or our company.
motor is running. 4: Contact the agent or our company.
3: Drive board abnormal
4: Module abnormal.
1: Ambient temperature is too 1: Lower the ambient temperature.
high. 2: Clean the air filter.
2: The air filter is clogged. 3: Replace the broken cooling fan.
Module
Err14 3: Cooling fan is broken. 4: Replace the broken thermally
overheated
4: The thermally sensitive sensitive resistor.
resistor is broken. 5: Replace the inverter module.
5: The inverter module is
217

broken.
Err15 1: External fault signal is input 1: Reset the operation.
External via DI. 2: Reset the operation.
equipment fault 2: External fault signal is input
via virtual I/O.
Communication Err16 1: Host computer works 1: Check the cabling of host computer.
fault abnormally. 2: Check communication cabling.
2: Communication cabling 3: Set F0-28 correctly.
abnormal 4: Set communication parameters
3: The Serial communication properly.
protocol selection (F0-28)
setting is improper.
3: The setting of
communication parameters
(group FD) is improper.
Contactor fault Err17 1: Drive board and power 1: Replace the abnormal drive board or
supply board abnormal. power supply board.
2: Contactor abnormal. 2: Replace the abnormal contactor.
Current Err18 1: Hall device abnormal. 1: Replace the abnormal hall device.
detection fault 2: Drive board abnormal. 2: Replace the abnormal drive board.
Motor tuning Err19 1: The motor parameters are 1: Set motor parameters based on the
fault not set based on nameplate. nameplate.
2: Motor tuning times out. 2: Check the connecting cable of the
inverter and motor.
Encoder fault Err20 1: Encoder type is incorrect. 1: Set the encoder type correctly based
2: Encoder wiring is wrong. on the actual situation.
3: Encoder is broken. 2: Eliminate the wiring fault.
4: PG card abnormal. 3: Replace the broken encoder.
4: Replace the abnormal PG card.
EEPROM Err21 1: EEPROM chip is broken. 1: Replace the main control board.
read-write fault
Inverter Err22 1: Overvoltage exists. 1: Clear the overvoltage fault.
hardware fault 2: Over-current exists. 2: Clear the over-current fault.
Short circuit to Err23 The motor is short circuited to Replace the cable or motor.
earth fault the ground.
Accumulative Err26 The accumulative running time Clear the record through the parameter
running time reaches the setting value. initiation function.
reaching fault
User defined Err27 1: User defined fault 1 signal is 1: Reset the operation.
fault 1 input via DI. 2: Reset the operation.
2: User defined fault 1 signal is
input via virtual I/O.
User defined Err28 1: User defined fault 2 signal is 1: Reset the operation.
fault 2 input via DI. 2: Reset the operation.
218

2: User defined fault 2 signal is

input via virtual I/O.
Accumulative Err29 The accumulative power-on Clear the record through the parameter
power-on time time reaches the setting value. initiation function.
reaching fault
Load becoming Err30 Inverter running current lower Check whether the load is
0 fault than F9-64. disconnected or the setting of F9-64
and F9-65 is correct.
PID feedback Err31 PID feedback lower than Check the PID feedback signal or set
lost fault during FA-26 FA-26 to a proper value.
running
With-wave Err40 1: Check whether the load is 1: Reduce the load and check the
current limit too heavy or the motor does motor and machine.
fault not rotate. 2: Select an inverter of bigger power
2: The inverter model is of too class.
small power class.
Motor Err41 Switch the motor via terminal Switch the motor after the inverter
switchover fault during running of the inverter. stops.
during running
Too big speed Err42 1: Encoder parameter setting 1: Set encoder parameters properly.
deviation fault is incorrect. 2: Perform motor tuning.
2: Motor tuning is not 3: Set the detection parameters based
performed. on the actual situation.
3: Setting of too big speed
deviation detection
parameters (F9-69 and F9-70)
is incorrect.
Motor Err43 1: Encoder parameter setting 1: Set encoder parameters properly.
over-speed is incorrect. 2: Perform motor tuning.
fault 2: Motor tuning is not 3: Set the detection parameters based
performed. on the actual situation.
3: Setting of too big speed
deviation detection
parameters (F9-69 and F9-70)
is incorrect.
Motor Err45 1: The cabling of temperature 1: Check the temperature sensor
overheated sensor becomes loose. cabling and eliminate cabling fault.
fault 2: The motor temperature is 2: Lower the carrier frequency or adopt
too high. other heat radiation measures.
Initial position Err51 The deviation of motor Check whether the motor parameters
fault parameters and the actual are correct and whether the setting of
situation is too big. rated current is too small.
8.2 Common Faults and Solutions

219

You may come across the following faults during the use of the inverter. Refer to the
following table for simple fault analysis.
SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions
There is no power grid voltage or the power
grid voltage is too low.
The switch power supply on the inverter Check the power input.
drive board is faulty. Check the bus voltage.
No display upon The rectifier bridge is broken. Re-connect the 8-core and
1
power-on The inverter buffer resistor is broken. 28-core cables.
The control board or the operation panel is Contact the agent or our
faulty. company.；
The cable connecting the control board and
the drive board and operation panel breaks.
The cabling between the drive board and
the control board is in poor contact.；
Re-connect the 8-core and
Related part on the control board is broken.
“HC” is displayed 28-core cables.
2 The motor or the motor cable is short
upon power-on. Contact the agent or our
circuited to the ground.
company.；
The hall device is faulty.
The power grid voltage is too low.
Measure the insulation of
“Err23” is The motor or the motor output line is short the motor and the output line
3 displayed upon circuited to the ground. with megger.
power-on. The inverter is damaged. Contact the agent or our
company.
The inverter
display is normal
upon power-on. Cooling fan is broken or does not rotate. Replace the cooling fan.
4 But it displays The external control terminal cabling is Eliminate external short
“HC” after running short circuited. circuit fault.
and stops
immediately.
Lower the carrier frequency
The setting of carrier frequency is too high.
Err14 (module (F0-15).
Cooling fan is broken, or the air filter is
overheated) fault Replace the cooling fan and
5 clogged. 。
is reported clean the air filter.
The internal part (thermal coupler or others)
frequently Contact the agent or our
of the inverter is damaged.
company.。
Check the motor and the motor cables. Ensure the cabling between
The inverter parameters are set improperly the inverter and he motor is
The motor does
(motor parameters). proper.
6 not rotate after the
The cabling between drive board and Replace the motor or clear
inverter runs
control board is in poor contact. mechanical faults.
The drive board is faulty. Check and re-set motor
220

SN Fault Possible Causes Solutions

parameters.
Check and reset the group

F4 parameters.
The parameter is set wrongly. Re-connect the cables.
DI terminal The jumper across OP and +24V becomes Contact our company.
7
disabled loose. Check the jumper across OP
Control board is faulty. and +24V.
Contact the agent or our
company.
The encoder is broken. Replace the encoder and
In closed loop
The encoder cabling is wrong or in poor ensure the cabling is proper.
vector control, the
8 contact. Replace the PG card.
motor speed is
The PG card is faulty. Contact the agent or our
always low.
The drive board is faulty. company.
Re-set motor parameters or
Servo drive perform motor tuning.
reports Setting of motor parameters is improper. Set proper
9 over-current and Acceleration/Deceleration time is improper. acceleration/deceleration
over-voltage error Load fluctuates. time.
frequently Contact the agent or our
company.；
Check whether:
 The contactor cable is
loose.
Err17 is reported
 The contactor is faulty
10 upon power-on or The soft startup contactor is not picked up.
 The contactor 24V
running
power supply is faulty.
Contact the agent or our
company.
i
11 Related part on the control board is broken. Replace the control board.
s displayed upon
power-on
221

Chapter 9 Appendix
Appendix A: I/O Extension Card (MD38IO1)

MD38IO1, developed by Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co., Ltd., is applicable to the
MD380 series inverters of 3.7kW or above.
Item Specification Description

Input terminals 5 digital inputs
One analog voltage input Supporting voltage input of -10V to 10V
Output One relay output
terminals One digital output
One analog output
Communication RS-485 communication Supporting the MODBUS-RTU communication
interface protocol (See Appendix I: MD380 MODBUS
Communication Protocol for details)
CAN communication Supporting the CANlink communication protocol;
interface
A.1 Mechanical Installation and Description of Control Terminals
 Appearance
 Installation
To install the extension card, do as follows:

1. Make sure the inverter is powered off.
2. Align the interface and locating holes of the extension card on the inverter’s control
board with the I/O extension card.
3. Fix the extension card with screws.
222

 Description of Control Terminals
Terminal
Type Terminal Function Description
Name
External +24V provides power supply to DI/DO terminals and external

+24V-COM
power supply sensors.

Power supply
OP1 is connected to +24V with J8 jumper upon delivery.
Digital input When external power supply is applied, OP1 needs to be
OP1
power supply connected to external power supply and remover J8
jumper.
4. Optical coupling isolation, accepting differential
voltage input and temperature detection resistance
input
5. Voltage input range: DC -10V to 10V

Analog input AI3-PGND Analog input 3
6. PT100, PT1000 temperature sensor
7. Input mode determined by dial-up switch S1,

multiple functions cannot be used simultaneously.
DI6-OP1 Digital input 6 1. Optical coupling isolation, compatible with dual

DI7-OP1 Digital input 7 polarity input
Digital inputs DI8-OP1 Digital input 8
2. Resistance input: 2.4kΩ
DI9-OP1 Digital input 9
3. Voltage range for level input: 9V-30V
Output voltage range: 0V-10V
Analog output AO2-GND Analog output 2
4. Optical coupling isolation, dual polarity open
collector output
Digital output DO2-CME Digital output 2 5. Output voltage range: 0V-24V
6. Output current range: 0mA-50mA
Note that CME1 and COM are internally insulated, but
223

Terminal
Type Terminal Function Description
Name
they are connected by J7 jumper by default. If you want
to drive DO2 by external power supply, remove the J7
jumper.
Normally
PA- PB Contact driving capacity:
Relay output closed terminal
AC250V. 3A, COSφ=0.4
(RELAY2) Normally open
PA- PC DC 30V, 1A
terminal
Communication
RS-485 MODBUS-RTU protocol communication input/output
485+/485- interface
communication terminal, isolation input
terminal
Communication
CAN CANlink protocol communication input terminal, isolation
CANH/CANL interface
communication input
terminal
 Description of Jumpers
Jumper Description
J3 AO2 output selection (voltage, current)
J4 CAN terminal matched resistance selection
J1 RS485 terminal matched resistance selection
J7 CME1 connection mode selection
J8 OP1 connection mode selection
S1 AI3, PT100, PT1000 function selection
When CANlink or MODBUS is adopted, connect a terminal resistor to the end inverter (J1
or J4 jumper).
Appendix B: Mini I/O Extension Card (MD38IO2)

MD38IO2, applicable to all the MD380 series inverters, is the simplified version of
MD38IO1 and provides three DI terminals.
B.1 Mechanical Installation and Description of Control Terminals
 Installation
To install the mini extension card, do as follows:

1. Make sure the inverter is powered off.
2. Align the interface and locating holes of the extension card on the inverter’s control
board with the I/O extension card.
3. Fix the mini extension card with screws.
224

Type Terminal Terminal Name Function Description

Provide +24V power supply to external unit.
External +24V power Generally, it provides power supply to DI/DO
+24V-COM
supply terminals and external sensors.
Power Maximum output current: 200mA

supply OP2 is connected to no power supply upon
delivery. It can be connected to external power
OP2 Digital input power supply
supply or +24V power supply based on actual
needs.
DI6-OP2 Digital input 6 1. Optical coupling isolation, compatible with

DI7-OP2 Digital input 7 dual polarity input
2. Resistance input: 3.3kΩ for DI6 and DI7,

2.4kΩ for DI8
Digital
inputs
4. DI6 and DI7 are common input terminals and
the input frequency<100Hz. DI8 is high-speed
pulse input terminal and the maximum input
frequency is 100kHz.
Appendix C: Programming Extension Card (MD38PC1)

MD38PC1, applicable to the MD380 series inverters of 3.7kW or above, is an extension
card that combines the PLC function. The user can enable the MD380 series inverters to
support the PLC (user programmable) function by using MD38PC1. The card supports
seamless connection with the inverter. Besides standard function codes, you can read the
special variables of the inverter, more advantageous compared with simple PLC+inverter.
MD38PC1 is compatible with Inovance’s PLC programming environment. In the condition

that the program capacity and peripheral devices do not exceed the range of MD38PC1,
225

the user program can be used in MD38PC1 without modification. In addition, the card
integrates the following extension I/O and general communication interfaces:
Item Specification Description
Input terminals 5 digital inputs
With isolation, Supporting
One analog voltage input
voltage input of -10V to 10V
Output 2 relay outputs
terminals One analog output
Communication RS-485 communication interface
C.1 Mechanical Installation and Description of Control Terminals
 Appearance
 Installation
The installation is the same as that of I/O extension card MD38IO1 in Appendix A.

Provide +24V power supply to external unit.
External +24V power Generally, it provides power supply to DI/DO

+24V-COM
supply terminals and external sensors.

Power supply OP1 is connected to +24V with J8 jumper upon
delivery.
Digital input power
OP1 When external power supply is applied, OP1 needs
supply
to be connected to external power supply and
remover J8 jumper.
8. Optical coupling isolation, accepting differential
voltage input and temperature detection
Analog input AI3-PGND Analog input 3 resistance input
9. Voltage input range: DC -10V to 10V
226


10. PT100, PT1000 temperature sensor
11. Input mode determined by dial-up switch S1,

multiple functions cannot be used
simultaneously.
DI6-OP1 Digital input 6 4. Optical coupling isolation, compatible with dual

DI7‐OP1 Digital input 7 polarity input
Digital inputs DI8‐OP1 Digital input 8
5. Resistance input: 2.4kΩ
DI9‐OP1 Digital input 9
DI10‐OP1 Digital input 10
Output voltage range: 0V-10V
Analog output AO2-GND Analog output 2
Relay 1 normally closed
PA- PB Contact driving capacity:
Relay output terminal
AC250V. 3A, COSφ=0.4
(RELAY2) Relay 2 normally open
PA2- PC2 DC 30V, 1A
terminal
485 communication
485+/485-
interface
RS485 MODBUS-RTU protocol communication
485 communication
communication input/output terminal, isolation input
GND isolation power supply
grounding
User program
RS422 CN1 User program downloading port (9-pin mini port)
downloading
Jumper Description
J2 AI3 input selection (voltage, current)
J3 AO2 output selection (voltage, current)
J1 RS485 terminal matched resistance selection
J7 CME1 connection mode selection
J8 OP1 connection mode selection
S1 AI3, PT100, PT1000 function selection
Appendix D: Profibus-DP Card (MD38DP1)

MD38DP1, applicable to the MD380 series inverters of 3.7kW or above, is used to
connect the inverter to Profibus-DP bus. The data exchange can satisfy all the inverter’s
functions, including configuration, parameter updating and adjusting, control signal
sending, monitoring and analysis.
The Profibus-DP card provided by Inovance conforms to the Profibus field bus standard.
With the MD380 series inverters, it can implement the field bus control.
 Appearance
227

 Installation
The installation is the same as that of I/O extension card MD38IO1 in Appendix A.

3 B data line Data line positive pole
4 RTS Request signal sending

Profibus communication
5 GND_ISO Isolated 5V power supply grounding
terminal (J2)
6 +5V_ISO Isolated 5V power supply
8 A data line Data line negative pole
+5V_ISO Power supply Isolated 5V power supply
CAN communication (J3, CANH CAN positive input
J9) CANL CAN negative input
GND_ISO Power supply grounding Isolated 5V power supply grounding
ARM program write-in

Program write-in SW1
interface
Jumper Description
J6 CAN terminal resistance selection
J8 Profibus terminal matching resistance selection
 Description of Dial-up Switch
Dial-up Bit Function Description
Bit1 Bit2 Baud rate

DP card and inverter OFF OFF 9.6K
1, 2 communication baud OFF ON 100K
rate selection ON OFF 200K
ON ON 600K
Profibus-DP The 6-bit binary system makes up 64 addresses. Other
3-8
communication slave addresses have to be set via function codes. Some salve
228

address addresses and switch setting are as follows:

Address Switch setting
0 00 0000
7 00 0111
20 01 0100
 Definition of LED Indicators
LED Indicator Function Description
If DP card is connected to the inverter, this LED

Green Power supply indicator
indicator is ON after the inverter is powered on.
If this LED indicator is on, it indicates that the DP card
is connected to the inverter normally.
DP card connected with
If this LED indicator flashes, it indicates that
Red inverter serial port
interference exists.
indicator
If this LED indicator is off, it indicates that the
connection fails. You can check the baud rate setting.
If this LED indicator is on, it indicates that the DP card
is connected to the Profibus master normally.
If this LED indicator flashes, it indicates that
DP card connected with
Yellow interference exists.
Profibus master indicator
If this LED indicator is off, it indicates that the
connection fails. You can check the slave address,
data format and Profibus cable connection.
Appendix E: General Encoder Extension Card

MD380 provides multiple kinds of encoder extension cards (PG card) for your choice. The
PG card is necessary for closed-loop vector control and applicable to all MD380 series
inverters. The PG card has the following models.
PG Card Description Others

MD38PG1 Differential input PG card without frequency dividing output Terminal wiring
UVW differential input PG card without frequency dividing
MD38PG3 DB15 female plug
output
MD38PG4 Rotary encoder PG card DB9 female plug
MD38PG5 OC input PG card with 1:1 frequency dividing output Terminal wiring
 Appearance
229

MD38PG1 MD38PG3 MD38PG4 MD38PG5
 Installation
Remove or install the PG card in the condition that the inverter is powered off.
Connect the J3 of the control board with the PG card via 18PinFFC.
 PG Card Specification and Definition of Wiring Terminal Signal
Differential PG Card (MD38PG1)

MD38PG1 Specification
User interface Oblique terminal strip
Clearance 3.5mm
screw slotted
Pluggable No
Cable specification 16-26AWG
Maximum speed 500KHz
Input differential signal
≤7V
amplitude
Definition of Wiring Terminal Signal of MD38PG1
SN Sign Description
1 A+ Encoder outputting signal A positive
2 A- Encoder outputting signal A negative
3 B+ Encoder outputting signal B positive
4 B- Encoder outputting signal B negative
5 Z+ Encoder outputting signal Z positive
6 Z- Encoder outputting signal Z negative
7 5V Provide 5V/100mA power supply externally
230

8 COM Power supply grounding

9 PE Shielded wiring end
UVW differential PG Card(MD38PG3)
User interface DB15 female plug
Pluggable Yes
Cable specification >22AWG
Input differential signal
amplitude ≤7V
SN Sign Description
1 A+ Encoder outputting signal A positive
2 A- Encoder outputting signal A negative
3 B+ Encoder outputting signal B positive
4 B- Encoder outputting signal B negative
5 Z+ Encoder outputting signal Z positive
6 Z- Encoder outputting signal Z negative
7 U+ Encoder outputting signal U positive
8 U- Encoder outputting signal U negative
9 V+ Encoder outputting signal V positive
10 V- Encoder outputting signal V negative
11 W+ Encoder outputting signal W positive
12 W- Encoder outputting signal W negative
13 +5V Provide 5V/100mA power supply externally
15 -
Rotary Encoder PG Card (MD38PG4)
User interface DB9 female plug
Pluggable Yes
Cable specification >22AWG
Resolution 12 bit
Excitation frequency 10KHz
VRMS 7V
VP-P 3.15±27%
SN Sign Description
1 EXC1 Rotary encoder excitation negative
2 EXC Rotary encoder excitation positive
3 SIN Rotary encoder SIN positive
4 SINLO Rotary encoder feedback SIN negative
5 COS Rotary encoder feedback COS positive
6 -
7 -
231

8 -
9 COSLO Rotary encoder feedback COS negative
OC PG Card (MD38PG5)
User interface Oblique terminal strip
Clearance 3.5mm
screw Slotted
Pluggable No
Cable specification 16-26AWG
SN Sign Description
1 A Encoder outputting signal A
2 B Encoder outputting signal B
3 Z Encoder outputting signal Z
4 15V Provide 5V/100mA power supply externally
7 A1 PG card 1:1 feedback output signal A
8 B1 PG card 1:1 feedback output signal B
9 PE Shielded wiring end
Appendix F: CANlink Communication Extension Card (MD38CAN1)

MD38CAN1, specially designed for the MD380 series inverter, is applicable to all the
models.
 Appearance
 Installation
The installation is the same as that of mini I/O extension card MD38IO2in Appendix B.
232


CAN communication CANH/CANL Communication interface CAN communication terminal
(CN1) COM CAN communication power supply grounding
Jumper Description
J2 CAN terminal matched resistance selection
When CANlink is adopted, connect a terminal resistor to the end inverter (J2 jumper).
Appendix G: MD380 Modbus Communication Protocol

The MD380 series inverter provides RS485 communication interface, and adopts the
Modbus-RTU slave communication protocol. The user can implement centralized control
via PC/PLC, like setting the inverter running command, modifying/reading parameters and
reading the inverter’s working status and fault information.
G.1 About Protocol
This serial communication protocol defines the transmission information and use format in
the series communication and it includes master-polling (or broadcasting) format, master
coding method and the content includes function code of action, transferring data and
error checking. The response of slave is the same structure, and it includes action
confirmation, returning the data and error checking etc. If slave takes place the error while
it is receiving the information or cannot finish the action demanded by master, it will send
one fault signal to master as a response.
G.2 Application Mode
The inverter will be connected into a “Single-master Multi-slave” PC/PLC control

network with RS485 bus.
G.3 Bus structure
 Hardware Interface
Insert the RS485 extension card MD38TX1 on the inverter.
 Topological mode
In the “Single-master Multi-slave” system, each device in the communication network has
its own slave address. One device works as the master (generally PC, PLC and HMI) to
initiate the communication. It performs parameter write-in or read-out operation and the
slaves respond to it. At the same time, only one device sends data and other devices
receive data.
The setting range of slave addresses is 0 to 247. Zero refers to broadcast communication
address. The address of slave must is exclusive in the network.
233

 Transmission mode
MD380 supports asynchronous series and half-duplex transmission mode. In the series
asynchronous communication, the data is sent out frame by frame in the form of message.
As specified in Modbus-RTU protocol, if the no data idle time of the communication data
line is greater than the 3.5Byte transmission time, it indicates the start of a communication
frame.
The MD380’s internal communication protocol is the Modbus-RTU slave communication

protocol, enabling the inverter to reply to the master’s “Inquiry/Command” with
communication data by or act according to the “Inquiry/Command”. Here, the master can
be PC, industrial control device or PLC. The master can not only visit one salve but also
send the broadcast information to all the slaves. For independent “Inquiry/Command”, the
visited slave has to return a response frame. For the “Inquiry/Command”, the slaves do
not need to respond.
 Communication Data Structure
The ModBus protocol communication data format of MD380 is shown below:
The inverter supports read-out and write-in of word-type parameters only. The read-out
command is Ox03 and the write-in command is 0x06. It does not support the read-out and
write-in of bytes or bits.
In theory, the host computer can read several continuous function codes (n can reach 12
at maximum). But note that the last function code of a group cannot be come across.
Otherwise, the reply will get wrong.
>3.5Byte 1Byte 1Byte 1Byte (2n)Byte 2Byte
Slave reads Slave

Read
Comm
Number
Function code CRC and
Idle (frame start) of bytes Idle
reply frame addr. and
0x03
(2n)
H----L H----L
Calculate CRC
234

If the slave detects communication frame fault or read-out/write-in failure caused by other
reasons, it will reply error frame as below:
The RTU frame format is described as below:
Frame Start (START) 3.5-character transmission time
Communication address : 1 to 247

Slave address (ADR)
Command code (CMD) 03:Read slave parameters 06: Write slave parameters
The invertal internal parameter address expressed in

Function code address (H)
heximecal system. The parameters include functional
parameters and non-functional parameters (running status
Function code address (L) and running command). During transmission, low bits
follow high bits.
Number of function codes(H) The number of function codes read by this frame. If it is 1, it
indicates that one function code is read. During
Number of function codes(L) transmission, low bits follow high bits.
Data (H)
The reply data or data to be writen in. During transmission,
low bits follow high bits.
Data (L)
CRC CHK high bits

Detection value: CRC16 verification value. During
transmission, low bits follow high bits.
CRC CHK low bits
END 3.5-character transmission time
235

CRC
In RTU mode, messages include an error-checking field that is based on a CRC method.
The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message. The CRC field is two bytes,
containing a 16-bit binary value. The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device,
which appends the CRC to the message. The receiving device recalculates a CRC during
receipt of the message and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received
in the CRC field. If the two values are not the same, an error occurs.
The CRC is started by 0xFFFF.Then a process begins of applying successive eight-bit
bytes of the message to the current contents of the register. Only the eight bits of data in
each character are used for generating the CRC. Start and stop bits, and the parity bit, do
not apply to the CRC.
During generation of the CRC, each eight-bit character is exclusive ORed with the register
contents. Then the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit (LSB), with a
zero filled into the most significant bit (MSB) position.The LSB is extracted and examined.
If the LSB was a 1, the register is then exclusive ORed with a preset, fixed value. If the
LSB was a 0, no exclusive OR takes place. This process is repeated until eight shifts have
been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next eight-bit byte is exclusive ORed with
the register's current value, and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described
above. The final contents of the register, after all the bytes of the message have been
applied, is the CRC value.
When the CRC is appended to the message, the low bits are appended first, followed by
the high bits. The CRC simple function is as follows:
unsigned int crc_chk_value（unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char length）{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
int i;
while（length--） {
crc_value^=*data_value++;
for（i=0;i<8;i++） {
if（crc_value&0x0001） {
crc_value=（crc_value>>1）^0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
return（crc_value）;
}
 Definition of Communication Parameter Addresses
Read and write function codes (Some function codes cannot be modified, only for the
236

manufacturer use and monitoring.)

The mark rules of Function code parameters address are as follows:
High-order bytes: F0 to FF (group F), A0-AF (group A) and 70-7F (group U).
Low-order bytes: 00 to FF
For example: the visiting address of F3-12 is 0xF30C.
【Note】 Group FF: The parameters cannot be read or modified.
Group U: The parameters can be read but cannot be modified.
Some parameters cannot be modified when the inverter is in the running status, while
some others cannot be modified in any status. When modifying parameters, pay attention
to the setting range, unit and related description.
Function Code Group Communication Address Function Code Modified in RAM

F0-FE 0xF000-0xFEFF 0x0000-0x0EFF
A0-AC 0xA000-0xACFF 0x4000-0x4CFF
U0 0x7000-0x70FF
In addition, frequently restoring EEPROM will reduce the serving life of EEPROM. In the
communication mode, and some function code need not be stored and only change the
RAM value.
For group F, change high order F of the function code to 0.
For group A, change high order A of the function code to 4.
Corresponding function code addresses are indicated below:
High byte: 00-0F, 40-4F (group A)
Low byte: 00-FF
For example: Function code F3-12 cannot be stored into EEPROM, the address is
indicated as 030C. Function code A0-05 cannot be stored into EEPROM, the address is
indicated as 4005.
This address can only act writing RAM, it cannot act reading, when act reading, it is invalid
address. For all parameters, the function can be implemented via function code 07H.
Stop/Running parameters
Parameter Parameter
Description Description
Address Address
Communication setup
1000 value(-10000 to 10000) 1010 PID setting
(Decimal)
1001 Running frequency 1011 PID feedback
1002 Bus voltage 1012 PLC process
1003 Output voltage 1013 Pulse input frequency, unit 0.01KHz
1004 Output current 1014 Feedback speed, unit 0.1Hz
1005 Output power 1015 Remaining running time
1006 Output torque 1016 AI1 voltage before correction
237

Parameter Parameter
Description Description
Address Address
1007 Running speed 1017 AI2 voltage before correction
1008 DI input flag 1018 AI3 voltage before correction
1009 DO output flag 1019 Linear speed
100A AI1 voltage 101A Current power-on time
100B AI2 voltage 101B Current running time
100C AI3 voltage 101C Pulse input frequency, unit 1Hz
100D Counting value input 101D Communication setting value
100E Length value input 101E Actual feedback speed
100F Load speed 101F Main frequency X display
1020 Auxiliary frequency Y display
Caution:
Communication setting value is the percentage of relative value, and 10,000 correspond
to 100.00%, -10000 correspond to -100.00%.
On the frequency dimension of the data, the percentage is the percentage of relative
maximum frequency (F0-10). To the torque dimension data, the percentage is F2-10,
A2-48, A3-48 and A4-48 (torque upper limit digital setting, corresponding to 1st, 2nd, 3rd
and 4th motor, respectively).
Control command input to inverter (writable)

Command word address Command function
0001: Forward running
0002: Reverse running
0003: Forward jog
2000
0004: Reverse jog
0005: Coast to stop
0007: Fault reset
Read inverter status (readable)

Status word address Status word function
0001: Forward running
3000 0002: Reverse running
0003: Stop
Parameters locking password checksum: (If the return is the 8888H, it indicates the
password checksum pass)
Password Address Contents of Input password
1F00 *****
Digital output terminal control: (writable)

Command address Command content
2001 BIT0: DO1 output control
238

BIT1: DO2 output control

BIT2:RELAY1 output control
BIT3:RELAY2 output control
BIT4:FMR output control
BIT5:VDO1
BIT6:VDO2
BIT7:VDO3
BIT8:VDO4
BIT9:VDO5
Analog output AO1 control: (writable)

2002 0-7FFF indicates 0%-100%
Analog output AO12 control: (writable)

Pulse output control: (writable)

Inverter fault description:
Inverter fault address Inverter fault information

0000: No fault 0015: Parameter read-out and write-in
0001: Reserved abnormality
0002: Acceleration over-current 0016: inverter hardware abnormality
0003: Deceleration over-current 0017: Motor short circuited to ground
0004: Constant over-current 0018: Reserved
0005: Acceleration over-voltage 0019: Reserved
0006: Deceleration over-voltage 001A: Running time reaching
0007: Constant over-voltage 001B: User defined fault 1
0008: Buffer resistance overloaded 001C: User defined fault 2
0009: Under-voltage 001D: Power-on time reaching
000A: Inverter overloaded 001E: Load becoming 0
8000
000B: Motor overloaded 001F: PID feedback loss during running
000C: Input phase missing 0028: Rapid current limit time-out
000D: Output phase failure 0029: Motor switchover during running
000E: Heatsink overheating 002A: Too big speed deviation
000F: External equipment fault 002B: Motor over-speed
0010: Communication fault 002D: Motor overheated
0011: Contactor fault 005A: The number of encoder pulses
0012: Current detection fault setting error
0013: Motor tuning fault 005B: Not connected with encoder
0014: Encoder/PG Fault 005C: Initial position error
005E: Speed feedback error
Description data of communication fault information (fault code)
239

Communication Inverter fault information

fault address
0000: No fault 0005: Invalid address
0001: Password error 0006: Parameter change invalid
8001 0002: Command 0007: The system is locked
0003: CRC checksum error 0008: EEPROM operation
0004: Invalid address
Group FD Communication parameter description
Function
Code
Baud rate Unit: Modbus baud rate 6005

0:300BPS
1:600BPS
2:1200BPS
3:2400BPS
Fd-00 4:4800BPS
5:9600BPS
6:19200BPS
7:38400BPS
8:57600BPS
9:115200BPS
This parameter is used to set the data transfer rate between host computer and the
inverter. Please note that baud rate of the host computer and the inverter must be
consistent. Otherwise, communication is impossible. Higher baud rate is, Faster
communication is.
Function
Code
Data format 0 No check: Data format<8,N,2> 0

1 Even parity Check :data format <8,E,1>
Fd-01
2 Odd Parity Check : data format<8,O,1>
3No check: Data format<8,N,1
The host computer and inverter setup data format must be consistent, otherwise,
communication is impossible.
Function
Code
Local address 1-247 1

Fd-02
When the local address is set to 0, that is, broadcast address, it can realize the broadcast
function of host computer. The local address is unique (except broadcast address), which
is the basis of realizing point-point communication between the host computer and
inverter.
240

Function
Code
Fd-03 Response delay 0-20ms 2ms
Response delay indicates the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to
sending data to the host computer. If the response delay is less than the system
processing time, then the response is based on the time delay of the system processing
time. If the response delay is more than the system processing time, after the system
processes the data, it should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is up, then
sending data to host machine.
Function
Code
Communication timeout 0.0s (invalid) 0.0s

Fd-04
0.1-60.0s
When it is set to 0.0 s, the communication timeout parameter is inactive.

If the interval time between the communication and the next communication is beyond the
communication timeout, the system will report communication failure error (Err16). At
normal circumstances, it will be set as inactive. If in the continuous communication system,
set the second parameter, you can monitor the communication status.
Function
Code
Communication protocol 0: Non-standard MODBUS protocol 0

Fd-05
selection 1: Standard MODBUS protocol
FD-05=1: Select standard MODBUS protocol

FD-05=0: When reading the command, the slave return is one byte than the standard
MODBUS’s protocol. For details, refer to communications Data Structure of this protocol.
Function
Code
Communication reading 0: 0.01A 0

Fd-06
current resolution 1: 0.1A
This parameter is used to determine the unit of the output current when the current is read
via communication.
241

MD380 Series Advanced Vector Vontrol Inverter User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MD380 Series Advanced Vector Vontrol Inverter User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MD380 Series Advanced Vector Vontrol Inverter User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main improvements of the MD380 series inverter compared to the MD320?

What are the main improvements of the MD380 series inverter compared to the MD320?

What control modes does the MD380 series inverter support?

What control modes does the MD380 series inverter support?

 The instructions are subject to change due to product upgrade, specification

 Service Hotline: 400-777-1260.

1. Multiple voltage classes

It provides coverage of single-phase 220V, three-phase 220V, three-phase 380V,

It supports vector control of three-phase AC asynchronous motor and three-phase AC

3. Diversified control modes

It supports communication via Modbus-RTU, Profibus-DP, CANlink and CANopen.

It supports various encoders such as differential encoder, open-collector encoder,

7. User programmable function

Virturl I/O It can implement various simple logic functions.

protectoon temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000) so as to realize motor

based on actual needs. The action modes are as below:

switchover be automatically switched over according to deviation.

PID feedback loss

It ensures the inverter to continue to run in short time at instantaneous

Upon unpacking, please check:

 IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 2003 Safety Regulations on Commissionable Electric Drive

 IEC/EN 61800-3: 2004 Commissionable Electric Drive System

Some products have passed the CE certification.

Connection to Peripheral Devices

 Because the inverter input/output (main circuit) contains harmonic components,

Chapter 1 Safety and Precautions

1.1 Safety Precautions

 Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage, component

Before  Handle it with care during transportation. Otherwise, the equipment

 Please mount the inverter on incombustible surface like metal. Keep

 When installing two inverters in a cabinet, pay attention to the

 Wiring may be performed only by authorized personnel under

 The mains and the inverter must be separated by a circuit breaker.

 Please tie the inverter to ground properly by standard. Otherwise,

 Do not connect power supply to the U, V and W output terminals of

 Brake resistor cannot be connected between the DC bus terminals

 Please make the following confirmations:

− Whether the power supply’s voltage class is consistent with the

− Whether input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W)

− Whether there is any short circuit in peripheral circuit;

− Whether the wiring is secured.

 Cover the inverter properly before power-on. Otherwise, electric

 All periphery devices must be wired properly under the instructions

 Do not open the inverter’s cover plate after power-on. Otherwise,

After electric shock may result.

 If parameter identification needs to be performed, note that personal

 Do not change the factory settings of the inverter. Otherwise, the

 Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the

 Signal detection may only be performed by qualified personnel

 Do not start/stop the inverter by turn the contactor ON/OFF.

 Repair or maintenance of the inverter may only be performed by

 Do not repair or maintain the inverter when it is powered on.

 All the insets must be unplugged in the condition of power-off.

 Reset and check the parameters when the inverter is replaced.

1.2 General Precautions

 Thermal Protection of Motor

 Running at over 50Hz

 Vibration of Mechanical Device

 Motor Heat and Noise